Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL

96.11.01

1151SBG000AA

EP2010/1083

GENERAL,
MECHANICAL/
ELECTRICAL
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

1151SBG000BA

CONTENTS
GENERAL

1. SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-1
1-1. Specifications of EP2010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-1
1-2. Specifications of EP1083 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-4
2. PRECAUTIONS FOR INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-7
3. PRECAUTIONS FOR USE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-8
4. HANDLING OF THE CONSUMABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-9
5. SYSTEM OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-10
5-1. System Options of EP2010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-10
5-2. System Options of EP1083 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-11

1151SBM000BA

MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL

1. CROSS-SECTIONAL VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-1

1-1. Cross-Sectional View of EP2010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-1
1-2. Cross-Sectional View of EP1083 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-2
2. COPY PROCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-3
3. DRIVE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-5
4. SEQUENTIAL EXPLANATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-6
5. PC DRUM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-11
6. IMAGING UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-12
6-1. Imaging Unit Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-13
6-2. Toner Recycling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-14
6-3. I/U Fuse F4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-14
7. DEVELOPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-15
7-1. ATDC Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-16
7-2. Magnet Roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-18
7-3. Developing Bias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-19
7-4. Doctor Blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-20
7-5. Magnet Roller Lower Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-20
8. CLEANING UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-21
8-1. Cleaning Bias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-22

i
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

CONTENTS
9. TONER HOPPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-23
9-1. Toner Hopper Locking/Unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-23
9-2. Toner Replenishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-23
9-3. Shutter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-24
9-4. Toner Hopper Home Position Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-24
9-5. Toner Bottle Vibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-25
9-6. Toner Replenishing Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-26
10. DRUM CHARGING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-27
11. IMAGE ERASE LAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-28
12. OPTICAL SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-31
12-1. Exposure Lamp LA1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-32
12-2. AE Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-33
12-3. Lamp Reflectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-34
12-4. Aperture Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-34
12-5. 1st/2nd Scanner Movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-35
12-6. 4th Mirror Movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-37
12-7. Lens Movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-38
13. ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTING SENSORS (EP2010 ONLY) . . . . . . . M-39
13-1. Original Size Detecting Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-39
14. MAIN ERASE LAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-41
15. IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-42
16. PAPER SEPARATOR FINGERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-44
17. PAPER TAKE-UP/FEED SECTION (2nd Drawer: EP2010 ONLY) . . M-46
17-1. Edge Guide and Trailing Edge Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-47
17-2. Drawer Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-48
17-3. Paper Lifting Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-48
17-4. Drawer-in-Position Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-49
17-5. Universal Tray (1st Drawer) Paper Size Detection . . . . . . . . . . M-50
17-6. Paper Empty Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-51
17-7. Paper Separating Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-52
17-8. Paper Take-Up Roll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-53
17-9. Paper Take-Up Retry Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-54
18. VERTICAL PAPER TRANSPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-55
19. SYNCHRONIZING ROLLERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-56
19-1. Upper Synchronizing Roller Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-57
19-2. Paper Dust Remover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-57
19-3. Synchronizing Roller Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-58

ii
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

CONTENTS
20. PAPER TRANSPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-59
21. FUSING UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-60
21-1. Fusing Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-61
21-2. Fusing Rollers Pressure Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-62
21-3. Oil Roller/Cleaning Roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-62
22. EXIT UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-63
22-1. Upper/Lower Separator Fingers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-63
22-2. Paper Exit Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-64
23. EXIT/DUPLEX SWITCHING UNIT (OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-65
24. DEHUMIDIFYING SWITCH (OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-66
25. MULTI BYPASS TABLE MB-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-67
25-1. Paper Take-Up Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-68
25-2. Paper Separating Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-70
25-3. Paper Empty Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-71
26. ORIGINAL COVER ANGLE DETECTION (EP2010 ONLY) . . . . . . . . M-72
27. COOLING FAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-73
28. OPTICAL SECTION COOLING FAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-74
29. MEMORY BACKUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-75

iii
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

1151SBG000D

SAFETY INFORMATION

ALL Areas
CAUTION
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type
recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according
to the manufacturer’s instructions.

Denmark
ADVARSEL!
Lithiumbatteri - Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering.
Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri
af samme fabrikat og type.
Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandøren.

Norway
ADVARSEL
Eksplosjonsfare ved feilaktig skifte av batteri.
Benytt samme batteritype eller en tilsvarende
type anbefalt av apparatfabrikanten.
Brukte batterier kasseres i henhold til fabrikantens
instruksjoner.

Sweden
VARNING
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.
Använd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent
typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren.
Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens
instruktion.

Finland
VAROITUS
Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu.
Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan
tyyppiin. Hävitä Käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden
mukaisesti.
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

1151SBG000CA

GENERAL
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

1151SBG0100A

1 SPECIFICATIONS
1151SBG0101A
1-1. Specifications of EP2010
TYPE : Desktop (with Stationary Platen)
PHOTOCONDUCTOR : Organic Photoconductor
COPYING SYSTEM : Electrostatic Dry Powdered Image Transfer to Plain
Paper
PAPER FEEDING : 3-Way Feeding 1st Drawer: Universal Tray
SYSTEM (250 sheets of paper)
2nd Drawer: Fixed Paper Size Tray
(250 sheets of paper)
Multi Bypass Table
EXPOSURE SYSTEM : Mirror Scanning, Slit Exposure
DEVELOPING SYSTEM : Minolta New Micro-Toning System
CHARGING SYSTEM : Comb Electrode DC Negative Corona with Scorotron
System
IMAGE TRANSFER : Visible Image Transfer by means of a Single-Wire DC
SYSTEM Negative Corona with Corotron System
PAPER SEPARATING : Single-Wire AC Corona with Corotron System, plus
SYSTEM Paper Separator Finger
FUSING SYSTEM : Heat Roller
PAPER DISCHARGING : Charge Neutralizing Brush
SYSTEM

MAXIMUM ORIGINAL : Metric-A3L; Inch-11” 17”L (L: Lengthwise)

SIZE

COPY MEDIUM
1st Drawer 2nd Drawer
Multi Bypass
(Automatic (Automatic
Table
feeding) feeding)
Plain paper
f f f
(60 to 90 g/m2)
Translucent paper – – f
Medium

Transparencies – – f
Thick paper
– – f
(91 to 157 g/m2)
Recycled paper f f f

Maximum
297  432 mm 297  432 mm 297  432 mm
sions

(Width  Length)
Dimens

Minimum
140  182 mm 140  182 mm 100  140 mm
(Width  Length)

f: Permissible X: Not permissible

G-1
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

MULTIPLE COPIES : 1 to 99
WARMING-UP TIME : 30 sec. or less with room temperature of 20°C and rated
power voltage
FIRST COPY TIME : A4C or 8-1/2”  11”C: 7.2 sec. or less
(in Full size Mode using 1st Drawer)

CONTINUOUS COPY SPEED (copies/min.): Fed from 1st Drawer

Zoom Ratio Zoom Ratio
Area 1.00 Area 1.00
Size Size

A3L 12 11” 17” (L) 11

A4L 16 8-1/2” 11” (L) 16
Metric Inch
A4C 21 8-1/2” 11” (C) 21
B4L 13 5-1/2” 8-1/2” (L) 21

L: Lengthwise; C: Crosswise

ZOOM RATIOS
Area
Metric Inch
Mode
Full Size 1.000 1.000
0.816 0.785
Fixed Reduction 0.707 0.647
0.500 0.500
1.154 1.214
Enlargement 1.414 1.294
2.000 2.000
Variable 50% to 200% (in 0.1% increments)

LENS : Through Lens (F = 8.0, f = 180 mm)

EXPOSURE LAMP : Halogen Frost Tube Lamp
FUSING : 195°C
TEMPERATURE

G-2
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

POWER/CURRENT CONSUMPTION (Copier Only)

Fusing
Exposure Max.
Heater Max. Power
Voltage Lamp In Standby Current
Lamp Consumption
(Rating) Consumption
(Rating)
115 V 115/200 V 1180 W 935 W
10.6 A
120 V 80 V 900 W 1220 W 965 W
225 W
115/120 V
127 V 1290 W 1070 W 10.4 A
900 W

220 V 160 V 220/240 V 1195 W 930 W

5.6 A
240 V 240 W 900 W 1270 W 1060 W

POWER : 115 V, 120 V, 127 V, 220 V, 240 V; 50/60 Hz

REQUIREMENTS

ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
Temperature 10 to 30°C with a fluctuation of 10°C or less per hour
Humidity 15 to 85% RH with a fluctuation of 10% RH or less per hour
Ambient Illumination 3,000 lux or less
Levelness 1°(1.75 mm/100 mm)

DIMENSIONS : Width .... 650 mm

(Copier Only) Depth .... 632.5 mm
Height ... 480 mm (including Original Cover)
WEIGHT : 57.5 kg (excluding the Copy Tray, Manual Bypass Table,
starter, toner, and paper)
STANDARD : Operator’s Manual*1, Setting-up Instructions, Starter*2, Copy
ACCESSORIES Tray, Auxiliary Cap
*1: Except Europe and Taiwan
*2: Europe only

G-3
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

1151SBG0102A
1-2. Specifications of EP1083
TYPE : Desktop (with Stationary Platen)
PHOTOCONDUCTOR : Organic Photoconductor
COPYING SYSTEM : Electrostatic Dry Powdered Image Transfer to Plain
Paper
PAPER FEEDING : 2-Way Feeding Paper Drawer: Universal Tray
SYSTEM (250 sheets of paper)
Manual Bypass Table
EXPOSURE SYSTEM : Mirror Scanning, Slit Exposure
DEVELOPING SYSTEM : Minolta New Micro-Toning System
CHARGING SYSTEM : Comb Electrode DC Negative Corona with Scorotron
System
IMAGE TRANSFER : Visible Image Transfer by means of a Single-Wire DC
SYSTEM Negative Corona with Corotron System
PAPER SEPARATING : Single-Wire AC Corona with Corotron System, plus
SYSTEM Paper Separator Finger
FUSING SYSTEM : Heat Roller
PAPER DISCHARGING : Charge Neutralizing Brush
SYSTEM

MAXIMUM ORIGINAL : Metric-A3L; Inch-11” 17”L (L: Lengthwise)

SIZE

COPY MEDIUM
Paper Drawer Manual Bypass
(Automatic feeding) (Single-sheet feeding)
Plain paper
f f
(60 to 90 g/m2)
Translucent paper – f
Medium

Transparencies – f
Thick paper
– f
(91 to 157 g/m2)
Recycled paper f f

Maximum
sions

297  432 mm 297  432 mm

(Width  Length)
Dimens

Minimum
140  182 mm 100  140 mm
(Width  Length)

f: Permissible X: Not permissible

G-4
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

MULTIPLE COPIES : 1 to 99
WARMING-UP TIME : 30 sec. or less with room temperature of 20°C and rated
power voltage
FIRST COPY TIME : A4C or 8-1/2”  11”C: 7.2 sec. or less
(in Full size Mode using 1st Drawer)

CONTINUOUS COPY SPEED (copies/min.): Fed from 1st Drawer

Zoom Ratio Zoom Ratio
Area 1.00 Area 1.00
Size Size

A3L 12 11” 17” (L) 11

A4L 16 8-1/2” 11” (L) 16
Metric Inch
A4C 18 8-1/2” 11” (C) 18
B4L 13 5-1/2” 8-1/2” (L) 18

L: Lengthwise; C: Crosswise

ZOOM RATIOS
Area
Metric Inch
Mode
Full Size 100% 100%
81% 78%
Fixed Reduction 70% 64%
50% 50%
115% 121%
Enlargement 141% 129%
200% 200%
Variable 50% to 200% (in 1% increments)

LENS : Through Lens (F = 8.0, f = 180 mm)

EXPOSURE LAMP : Halogen Frost Tube Lamp
FUSING : 195°C
TEMPERATURE

G-5
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

POWER/CURRENT CONSUMPTION (Copier Only)

Fusing
Exposure Max.
Heater Max. Power
Voltage Lamp In Standby Current
Lamp Consumption
(Rating) Consumption
(Rating)
115 V 115/120 V 1180 W 935 W
10.4 A
120 V 80 V 900 W 1220 W 965 W
225 W
115/120 V
127 V 1290 W 1070 W 10.4 A
900 W

220 V 160 V 220/240 V 1195 W 930 W

5.6 A
240 V 240 W 900 W 1270 W 1060 W

POWER : 115 V, 120 V, 127 V, 220 V, 240 V; 50/60 Hz

REQUIREMENTS

ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
Temperature 10 to 30°C with a fluctuation of 10°C or less per hour
Humidity 15 to 85% RH with a fluctuation of 10% RH or less per hour
Ambient Illumination 3,000 lux or less
Levelness 1°(1.75 mm/100 mm)

DIMENSIONS : Width .... 610 mm

(Copier Only) Depth .... 632.5 mm
Height ... 401 mm (including Original Cover)
WEIGHT : 51 kg (excluding the Manual Bypass Table, starter,
toner, and paper)
STANDARD : Operator’s Manual*1, Setting-up Instructions, Starter*2, Copy
ACCESSORIES Tray, Manual Bypass Table*3, Auxiliary Cap

*1: Except Europe and Taiwan

*2: Europe only
*3: Except Taiwan

G-6
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

1151SBG0200A

2 PRECAUTIONS FOR INSTALLATION

J Installation Site
To ensure safety and utmost performance of the copier, the copier should NOT be
used in a place:
F Where it will be subject to extremely high or low temperature or humidity.
F Which is exposed to direct sunlight.
F Which is in the direct air stream of an air conditioner, heater or ventilator.
F Which puts the operator in the direct stream of exhaust from the copier.
F Which has poor ventilation.
F Where ammonia gas might be generated.
F Which does not have a stable, level floor.
F Where it will be subject to sudden fluctuations in either temperature or humidity.
If a cold room is quickly heated, condensation forms inside the copier, resulting in
blank spots in the copy.
F Which is near any kind of heating device.
F Where it may be splashed with water.
F Which is dirty or where it will receive undue vibration.
F Which is near volatile flammables or curtains.

J Power Source
Use an outlet with a capacity of 115/120/127V, 13.2A or more, or 200/220/240V, 8.1A
or more.
F If any other electrical equipment is sourced from the same power outlet, make sure
that the capacity of the outlet is not exceeded.
F Use a power source with little voltage fluctuation.
F Never connect by means of a multiple socket any other appliances or machines
to the outlet being used for the copier.
F Make the following checks at frequent intervals:
D Is the power plug abnormally hot?
D Are there any cracks or scrapes in the cord?
D Has the power plug been inserted fully into the outlet?
D Does something, including the copier itself, ride on the power cord?
F Ensure that the copier does not ride on the power cord or communications cable
of other electrical equipment, and that it does not become wedged into or under-
neath the mechanism.

J Grounding
To prevent receiving electrical shocks in the case of electrical leakage, always ground
the copier.
F Connect the grounding wire to:
D The ground terminal of the outlet.
D A grounding contact which complies with the local electrical standards.
F Never connect the grounding wire to a gas pipe, the grounding wire for a telephone,
or a water pipe.

G-7
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

1151SBG0300A

3 PRECAUTIONS FOR USE

To ensure that the copier is used in an optimum condition, observe the following pre-
cautions.
F Never place a heavy object on the copier or subject the copier to shocks.
F Insert the power plug all the way into the outlet.
F Do not attempt to remove any panel or cover which is secured while the copier is
making copies.
F Do not turn OFF the Power Switch while the copier is making copies.
F Provide good ventilation when making a large number of copies continuously.
F Never use flammable sprays near the copier.
F If the copier becomes inordinately hot or produces abnormal noise, turn it OFF and
unplug it.
F Do not turn ON the Power Switch at the same time when you plug the power cord
into the outlet.
F When unplugging the power cord, do not pull on the cord; hold the plug and pull
it out.
F Do not bring any magnetized object near the copier.
F Do not place a vase or vessel containing water on the copier.
F Be sure to turn OFF the Power Switch at the end of the workday or upon power
failure.
F Use care not to drop paper clips, staples, or other small pieces of metal into the
copier.

J Operating Environment
The operating environmental requirements of the copier are as follows.
D Temperature: 10°C to 30°C with a fluctuation of 10°C per hour
D Humidity: 15% to 85% RH with a fluctuation of 10% RH per hour

J Power Requirements
The power source voltage requirements are as follows.
D Voltage Fluctuation: AC115/120/127/220/240V
"10% (Copying performance assured)
+6%, –10% (Only AC127V)
–15% (Paper feeding performance assured)
D Frequency Fluctuation: 50/60 Hz "0.3%

G-8
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

1151SBG0400A

4 HANDLING OF THE CONSUMABLES

Before using any consumables, always read the label on its container carefully.
F Use the right toner. The applicable copier model name is indicated on the Toner
Bottle.
F Paper is apt to be easily damaged by dampness. To prevent absorption of
moisture, store paper, which has been removed from its wrapper but not loaded
into the Drawer, in a sealed plastic bag in a cool, dark place.
F Keep consumables out of the reach of children.
F Do not touch the PC Drum with bare hands.
F Store the paper, toner, and other consumables in a place free from direct sunlight
and away from any heating apparatus.
F The same sized paper is of two kinds, short grain and long grain. Short grain paper
should only be fed through the copier crosswise, long grain paper should only be
fed lengthwise.
F If your hands become soiled with toner, wash them with soap and water
immediately.
F Do not throw away any used consumables (PC Drum, starter, toner, etc.). They are
to be collected.

NOTE
Do not burn, bury in the ground, or throw into the water any
consumables (PC Drum, starter, toner, etc.).

G-9
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

1151SBG0500A

5 SYSTEM OPTIONS
1151SBG0501A
5-1. System Options of EP2010

1 2

7
5

1. Automatic Document Feeder AF-5 5. Paper Feed Cabinet PF-204

2. Duplexing Document Feeder AFR-12 6. Duplex Unit AD-8
3. Paper Feed Cabinet PF-104 7. 10-Bin Sorter S-106
4. Duplex Cabinet PF-4D 8. Staple Sorter ST-104

G-10
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

1151SBG0502A
5-2. System Options of EP1083

3
1142O010AA

1. Automatic Document Feeder AF-5

2. Multi Bypass Table MB-4
3. 10-Bin Sorter S-106

G-11
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

1151SBM000CA

MECHANICAL/
ELECTRICAL
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

1151SBM0100A

1 CROSS-SECTIONAL VIEW
1151SBM0101A
1-1. Cross-Sectional View of EP2010

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

1
11
12

13

23
22
14
21
15
24
20
19

18
1151M010AA
25
17 16

1. 3rd Mirror 17. Image Transfer/Paper Separa-

2. 2nd Mirror tor Coronas
3. 1st Mirror 18. Suction Unit
4. Exposure Lamp LA1 19. Cleaning Roller
5. Lamp Reflector 20. Oil Roller
6. Lens 21. Upper/Lower Fusing Roller
7. Cleaning Blade 22. Paper Exit Roller
8. PC Drum Charge Corona 23. Exit/Duplex Switching Guide
9. Unexposed Areas/Edge Erase (for optional Duplex Unit AD-8
Lamp LA3 and Sorter S-106 & ST-104)
10. 4th Mirror 24. Duplex Unit Vertical Transport
11. PC Drum Roller 1
12. Sleeve/Magnet Roller (for optional Duplex Unit AD-8)
13. Synchronizing Roller 25. Duplex Unit Vertical Transport
14. Transport Roller Roller 2
15. 1st/2nd Drawer Paper Take-Up (for optional Duplex Unit AD-8)
Roll
16. 1st/2nd Drawer

M-1
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

1151SBM0102A
1-2. Cross-Sectional View of EP1083
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

1
11
12

13

24
23
14
22
21 15

20
1152M001AA

19 18 17 16

1. 3rd Mirror 17. Image Transfer/Paper Separa-

2. 2nd Mirror tor Coronas
3. 1st Mirror 18. Suction Unit
4. Exposure Lamp LA1 19. Cleaning Roller
5. Lamp Reflector 20. Oil Roller
6. Lens 21. Upper/Lower Fusing Roller
7. Cleaning Blade 22. Paper Exit Roller
8. PC Drum Charge Corona 23. Exit/Duplex Switching Guide
9. Image Erase Lamp LA3 (for optional Sorter S-106)
10. 4th Mirror 24. Paper Exit Roller in Exit/Duplex
11. PC Drum Switching Guide Unit
12. Sleeve/Magnet Roller (for optional Sorter S-106)
13. Synchronizing Roller
14. Transport Roller
15. Paper Take-Up Roll
16. Drawer

M-2
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

1151SBM0200A

2 COPY PROCESS

2 3

4
10

9 1 5

MULTI BYPASS
13 12 11 8 7 TABLE

1. PC DRUM 8. PAPER SEPARATION

2. DRUM CHARGING 9. CLEANING
3. IMAGE ERASE 10. MAIN ERASE 6
4. EXPOSURE 11. TRANSPORT
5. DEVELOPING 12. FUSING
6. PAPER FEEDING 13. PAPER EXIT
7. IMAGE TRANSFER

1. PC Drum
The PC Drum is an aluminum cylinder coated with a photosensitive semiconductor.
It is used as the medium on which a visible developed image of the original is formed.
(For more details, see p. M-11.)
2. Drum Charging
The PC Drum Charge Corona Unit is equipped with a Comb Electrode and a Scorotron Grid to
deposit a uniform negative charge across the entire surface of the PC Drum.
(For more details, see p. M-27.)
3. Image Erase
Any areas of charge which are not to be developed are neutralized by lighting up LEDs.
(For more details, see p. M-28.)
4. Exposure
Light from the Exposure Lamp reflected off the original is guided to the surface of the PC
Drum and reduces the level of the negative charges, thereby forming an electrostatic latent
image.
(For more details, see p. M-31.)
5. Developing
Toner positively charged in the Developer Mixing Chamber is attracted onto the electrostatic
latent image changing it to a visible, developed image. A DC negative bias voltage is applied
to the Sleeve/Magnet Roller to prevent toner from being attracted onto those areas of the PC
Drum which correspond to the background areas of the original.
(For more details, see p. M-15.)

M-3
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

6. Paper Feeding
Paper is fed either automatically from the 1st or 2nd Drawer, or manually via the Multi Bypass
Table or Manual Bypass Table. Each Drawer has fingers that function to separate the top
sheet of paper from the rest at take-up. (2nd Drawer : EP2010 Only)
(For more details, see p. M-46.)
7. Image Transfer
The single-wire Image Transfer Corona Unit applies a DC negative corona emission to the
underside of the paper, thereby attracting toner onto the surface of the paper.
(For more details, see p. M-42.)
8. Paper Separation
The single-wire Paper Separator Corona Unit applies an AC corona emission to the underside
of the paper to neutralize the paper. In addition, mechanical paper separation is provided by
the two PC Drum Paper Separator Fingers fitted to the Imaging Unit.
(For more details, see p. M-42)
9. Cleaning
Residual toner on the surface of the PC Drum is scraped off by the Cleaning Blade.
(For more details, see p. M-21.)
10. Main Erase
Light from the Main Erase Lamp neutralizes any surface potential remaining on the surface of
the PC Drum after cleaning.
(For more details, see p. M-41.)
11. Transport
The paper is fed to the Fusing Unit by the Suction Belts.
(For more details, see p. M-59.)
12. Fusing
The developed image is permanently fused to the paper by a combination of heat and
pressure applied by the Upper and Lower Fusing Rollers.
(For more details, see p. M-60.)
13. Paper Exit
After the fusing process the paper is fed out by the Paper Exit Roller onto the Copy Tray.
(For more details, see p. M-63.)

M-4
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

1151SBM0300A

3 DRIVE SYSTEM
This copier is equipped with two main drive motors, PC Drive Motor M1 that drives
the upper half of the copier (Imaging Unit) and Main Drive Motor M2 which gives
drive for the lower half of the copier (paper take-up/feeding and transport
mechanism and Fusing Unit). Each has its own drive transmitting gears and timing
belts as illustrated below.
Coupled to Exit/Duplex
Drive Train for Lower Half of Copier Switching Unit
Paper Exit Roller Drive

Suction Unit
Drive
Upper Fusing
Roller Drive

Main Drive Motor M2

Synchronizing Roller Clutch CL 1

Paper Transport
Coupled to Paper Drive Train for Upper
Clutch CL 2
Take-Up Unit Half of Copier
PC Drum Drive

Drive Train for

Imaging Unit
Paper Take-Up Unit
Drive
<EP2010> Coupled to Copier Gear

PC Drive Motor M1
<EP1083>
Coupled to Copier Gear
1st Vertical
1st Drawer Paper
Transport Roller
Take-Up Roll
Vertical
Transport Roller
2nd Drawer Paper
Take-Up Roll
Paper Drawer Paper
2nd Vertical Take-Up Roll
Transport Roller 1142M002AA

M-5
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

1151SBM0400A

4 SEQUENTIAL EXPLANATION
*Numbers given in rectangles in the following flowchart are timer values in sec.

A The power cord is plugged into the outlet.

Power cord is plugged in.

ON
DC24V for Drum heating (PU2)
ON
Drum Dehumidifying
Heater H2 Only when Serviceman
ON Switch S3 is ON
Paper Dehumidifying
Heater H3

B Power Switch S1 is turned ON.

S1 ON
OFF
H2
ON DC5V (PWB-C)
ON DC24V (PU2)
ON Control panel
ON The Cooling Fan turns at full speed.
ON
Approx. 3 The Cooling Fan turns at half speed.
ON
Approx. 0.5 Fusing Heater Lamp H1
ON Scanner Reference Position Sensor PC81
*If the Scanner is not at the home position, Scanner Motor
M5 is energized to move the Scanner to the home position.
ON Lens Reference Position Sensor PC90
*If the Lens is not at the home position, Lens Motor M6 is
energized to move the Lens to the home position.
ON Mirror Reference Position Sensor PC86
*If the 4th Mirror is not at the home position, Mirror Motor M7
is energized to move the Mirror to the home position.

Starter setup and ATDC Sensor automatic adjustment

*Only when the Imaging Unit is new. I/U Fuse F4 blows
when the starter setup sequence is completed normally.

M-6
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

C The Fusing Unit temperature reaches 205°C.

Fusing Thermistor TH1 detects 205°C.

ON/OFF
Fusing Heater Lamp H1
*The Fusing Unit temperature control is started.

M-7
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

D The Start Key is pressed.

Start Key ON
ON PC Drive Motor M1
ON
Main Erase Lamp LA2
ON
Main Drive Motor M2
ON
Image Erase Lamp LA3
*All LEDs are turned ON.
ON
Developing Bias (High Voltage Unit HV1)
ON
Paper Separator Corona (HV1)
ON
Cleaning Bias (HV1)
*Some models have no Bias Seal installed depending
on their marketing areas.
ON
Synchronizing Roller (CL1) *For approx 0.2 sec only

Approx. 0.3 ON
Paper Take-Up Roll (1st/2nd Drawer Paper
Take-Up Solenoid SL2/SL3)
OFF
Approx. 0.1 SL2/SL3 (SL3 : EP2010 only)
Approx. 0.2 ON
PC Drum Charge Corona/Image Transfer
Corona (HV1)
Approx. 0.2 ON
Transport Roller (Paper Transport Clutch CL2)

Approx. 2.5 ON
Synchronizing Roller (CL1)

E Paper is taken up.

1st/2nd Drawer Paper Take-Up Solenoid SL2/SL3 ON (SL3 : EP2010 only)

Approx. ON
1st/2nd Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor PC55/PC56
0.4

1st Drawer: ON
Transport Roller Sensor PC51
Approx. 0.7
2nd Drawer: Approx. ON Paper Leading Edge
Approx. 1.4 0.5 Detecting Sensor PC54
(EP2010 Only)
Approx. OFF Paper
0.2 Transport
Clutch CL2
Approx. ON Exposure Lamp LA1
0.2

M-8
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

Approx. ON
Scanner Motor M5
0.6 OFF
Scanner Reference Position Sensor PC81

Approx. Image Erase Lamp LA3 LEDs ON/OFF con-

0.3 trol is started.
Approx. ON Synchronizing Roller Clutch
0.2 CL1
ON
CL2

Approx. ON Separator Fingers

0.4 (Separator Solenoid
SL1)
Approx. OFF SL1
0.4

F A scan motion is completed.

SCEND signal: LOW

Approx. ON All LEDs of Unexposed Areas/Edge Erase Lamp LA3

0.2 ON

Approx. Scanner starts return motion.

0.3

Approx. ON
Scanner Reference Position Sensor PC81
0.6
*For A4 crosswise, 1.000

Approx. OFF Exposure Lamp LA1

0.3

M-9
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

G The last paper moves past Transport Roller Sensor PC51.

PC51 OFF

OFF
Approx. Paper Leading Edge Detecting Sensor PC54
0.6
Approx. OFF
Synchronizing Roller (Synchronizing
0.4 Roller Clutch CL1)

Approx. OFF
PC Drum Charge Corona/Image Transfer
0.7 Corona (High Voltage Unit HV1)
OFF
Approx. PC Drive Motor M1
0.7 OFF
Main Erase Lamp LA2
OFF
Unexposed Areas/Edge
Erase Lamp LA3
OFF
Approx. Developing Bias (HV1)
0.5 OFF
Cleaning Bias (HV1)
*Some models have no Bias Seal
installed depending on their
marketing areas.
OFF
Paper Separator Corona (HV1)
Approx. OFF
Transport Roller (CL2)
1.2

Approx. ON
Paper Exit Sensor PC53
2.6

H The paper moves past Paper Exit Sensor PC53.

PC53 OFF

Approx. OFF Main Drive Motor M2

2.3

M-10
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

1151SBM0500A

5 PC DRUM
The photoconductive drum used in this copier is the organic photoconductor (OPC)
type. The drum is made up of two distinct, semiconductive materials on an alumi-
num alloy base. The outer of the two layers is called the Charge Transport Layer
(CTL), while the inner layer is called the Charge Generating Layer (CGL).

The PC Drum has its grounding point inside at its rear end. When the Imaging Unit
is installed in the copier, the shaft on which the PC Drum Drive Coupling Gear is
mounted contacts this grounding point.

Handling Precautions
This photoconductor exhibits greatest light fatigue after being exposed to light over
an extended period of time. It must therefore be protected from light by a clean, soft
cloth whenever the Imaging Unit has been removed from the copier. Further, use
utmost care when handling the PC Drum to prevent it from being contaminated.
PC Drum Cross-Sectional View

PC Drum CTL
CGL
Aluminum
Cylinder

Gear

Shaft

Grounding Point

Grounding
Plate
PC Drum Drive Coupling Gear

M-11
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

1139SBM0600A

6 IMAGING UNIT
This copier is equipped with an Imaging Unit, or IU, which integrates a PC Drum,
PC Drum Charge Corona, Developing Unit, Cleaning Unit, and Toner Recycling
mechanism into one assembly. The Unit also includes the Upper Synchronizing
Roller which facilitates clearing of a paper misfeed.

Corona Unit Cleaning PC Drum Coupled to Gear

Lever Charge Corona in Copier
PC Drum

Developer Mixing Chamber

Counter

Toner Supply Port

Paper Separator Fingers

Upper Synchronizing Roller

Paper Guide Plate

M-12
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

1139SBM0601A
6-1. Imaging Unit Drive
Drive for the Imaging Unit is transmitted by one of the gears on the Unit.
This particular gear is in mesh with the Imaging Unit Drive Gear in the copier.

Developer Mixing Screw Drive Gear

Bucket Roller Drive Gear

Sleeve/Magnet Roller
Imaging Unit Drive
Drive Gear
Gear (in Copier)

Toner Recycling Coil

Drive Gears
Coupling (in Copier)

M-13
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

1151SBM0602A
6-2. Toner Recycling
The copier is provided with a toner recycling mechanism. The toner, which has been
scraped off the surface of the PC Drum by the Cleaning Blade and collected in the
Cleaning Unit, is conveyed by the two Toner Recycling Coils to the Toner Supply
Port and, from there, it is returned back to the Developer Mixing Chamber of the
Developing Unit.

One of the gears of the Toner Recycling mechanism receives drive through a gear
at the rear end of the PC Drum.

Toner Supply Port

Toner Recycling Path Toner Recycling Coil

Bevel Gears

Toner Recycling Coil

1151SBM0603A
6-3. I/U Fuse F4
The Imaging Unit is provided with a fuse called I/U Fuse F4. When a new Imaging
Unit is installed in the copier and the Power Switch turned ON, an I/U Set signal is
output causing the copier to start the starter setup sequence and ATDC Sensor
automatic adjustment.

When the starter setup sequence is completed normally, an I/U Fuse Blow signal
is output to blow F4. Once F4 is blown, the I/U Set signals are no longer output. This
means that the starter setup sequence and ATDC Sensor automatic adjustment will
not be carried out when the Power Switch is thereafter turned ON.

When Fuse is When Fuse is

Control Signal not Blown Blown WIRING DIAGRAM

F4 PWB-A PJ1A-6 H L 30-B

M-14
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

1151SBM0700A

7 DEVELOPMENT
The Developing Unit built into the Imaging Unit performs the following functions:
D Mixes the toner and carrier well to ensure that a sufficient amount of toner is
positively charged.
D Detects the toner-to-carrier ratio of the developer by means of the ATDC Sensor
and replenishes the supply of toner as necessary.
D Detects a toner empty condition by means of the ATDC Sensor.
D Ensures that a proper amount of toner is attracted to the PC Drum by means of
its Sleeve/Magnet Roller, Developing Bias, and Doctor Blade.

PC Drum

Developer Mixing Screw

Doctor Blade

Sleeve/Magnet Roller Bucket Roller ATDC Sensor

M-15
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

1151SBM0701A
7-1. ATDC Sensor
ATDC Sensor UN3 installed on the underside of the Developer Mixing Chamber
detects the varying toner-to-carrier ratio of the developer which flows over it in the
Chamber. The copier CPU compares the detected ratio with the ratio set by the
ATDC Detection Level Mode (Tech. Rep. Choice SCH-90) to control toner
replenishment.
Set T/C (%) ATDC Output Voltage (V)
4.0 2.692
4.5 2.596
5.0 2.5 (Standard)
5.5 2.404
6.0 2.308
6.5 2.212
7.0 2.116

Toner is replenished for 5 seconds (the Toner Bottle is turned one turn, which is
equivalent to a run of 2 copy cycles) for each Toner Replenishing signal.
If the toner-to-carrier ratio becomes lower than 2.5%, the copier inhibits the initiation
of a new copy cycle (this feature can be enabled or disabled by a Tech. Rep. Choice
mode). When a ratio of 3% or more is recovered as a result of Auxiliary Toner
Replenishing, the copier permits the initiation of a new copy cycle.
If the Front Door is swung open and closed with a T/C ratio of less than 3%, the copi-
er initiates an Auxiliary Toner Replenishing sequence. (It stops the sequence as
soon as a T/C ratio of 3.5% is reached.)
ATDC Sensor Automatic Adjustment
An automatic adjustment of the ATDC Sensor is made in the F8 Test Mode
operation and when a new Imaging Unit is installed in the copier.

*When a New Imaging Unit is Installed in the Copier:

Following the execution of the starter setup mode upon power-up, the copier
CPU reads the output value of the ATDC Sensor and establishes the reading
as the reference value.

*When F8 is Run after Starter Has Been Changed:

Following the execution of the starter setup mode upon pressing of the Start
Key, the copier CPU reads the output value of the ATDC Sensor and establishes
the reading as the reference value.

NOTE: If an F8 operation is run at a time when the starter has not been changed,
it can result in a wrong T/C reference value being set by the copier. Avoid
casual use of F8.
If the setting value has been cleared because of the RAM Board being
replaced, however, enter the ATDC control value before the replacement
using the Zoom Up/Down Keys in the F8 operation (without pressing the
Start Key).

M-16
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

Toner Empty Detection

The copier has no toner empty detecting sensor and, instead, the ATDC Sensor
performs that function. The ATDC Sensor checks the toner-to-carrier ratio and, if
it reads a T/C ratio lower than the set level for 37 copies and, further, if it next reads
a ratio 1% lower than the setting, this is a toner-empty condition. The toner-empty
condition is canceled after detection under any of the following conditions:
D The set T/C ratio has been recovered.
D After the Front Door has been swung open and closed.

Standard
Control Signal Set T/C Output WIRING DIAGRAM
Voltage
4.0% 2.692
4.5% 2.596
5.0% 2.5
UN3 PWB-A PJ1A-3 5.5% 2.404 30-B
6.0% 2.308
6.5% 2.212
7.0% 2.116

M-17
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

1151SBM0702A
7-2. Magnet Roller
The Magnet Roller of the Sleeve/Magnet Roller of this copier has the following
magnetic characteristics. Part of pole S2 before the principal N1 pole (i.e., the area
marked as S2b in the Fig. below) provides a very weak magnetic force. If developer
is compacted and clogs at the Doctor Blade and, as a result, part of the surface of
the Sleeve/Magnet Roller is not covered with developer, the nearby developer
around S2b goes to those uncovered areas because of its weak magnetic force.
This helps prevent blank lines from occurring on the copy.

The Sleeve Roller, onto which developer is attracted by the magnetic fields of force
set up by the poles of the Magnet Roller, turns to convey the developer toward the
point of development. It also means that the developer fresh from the Developer
Mixing Chamber is always brought to the point of development.

As we noted earlier, the Imaging Unit integrates the Developing Unit with the PC
Drum into one body. Because of that, it is impossible to move the Developing Unit
against the PC Drum, thereby providing a certain distance between the PC Drum
and Sleeve/Magnet Roller. The Magnet Roller has therefore been made movable:
the Bushing is pressed by compression springs thereby pressing the Positioning
Collars on both ends of the Magnet Roller against the PC Drum. This ensures a
given distance between the PC Drum and the Sleeve/Magnet Roller.

Magnetic Pole Positioning

Pole Having Weak

Magnetic Force

Movable Bushing

Compression Spring
Fixed Bushing
PC Drum

M-18
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

1151SBM0703A
7-3. Developing Bias
A negative voltage (Vb = Developing Bias voltage) is applied to the Sleeve Roller
to prevent a foggy background on the copy. The amount of toner attracted onto the
surface of the PC Drum depends on how much lower the PC Drum surface potential
(Vi) is than Vb (i.e., the potential difference).
D When the potential difference is large, a greater amount of toner is attracted.
D When the potential difference is small, a smaller amount of toner is attracted.
Because the Magnet Roller of this copier is movable, a flat spring is used as the Bias
Terminal which follows the movement of the Magnet Roller.

Bias Terminal

Magnet Roller

Control Signal ON OFF WIRING DIAGRAM

Developing Bias PWB-A PJ12A-4 L H 30-A

M-19
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

1151SBM0704A
7-4. Doctor Blade
The Doctor Blade installed over the Sleeve/Magnet Roller regulates the height of
the developer brush on the surface of the Sleeve Roller. The Blade is perpendicular
to the direction of movement of the Magnet Roller to minimize variations in the dis-
tance between the Doctor Blade and Magnet Roller as the Magnet Roller moves.

Doctor Blade

Direction of Magnet
Roller Movement

Magnet Roller

1139SBM0705A
7-5. Magnet Roller Lower Filter
*Except the U.S.A., Canada, and Europe
There is a slit provided under the Magnet Roller to collect insufficiently charged
toner in the grounded Toner Antispill Receiver. This effectively prevents the toner
from spilling onto the mechanisms inside the copier.

Magnet Roller

Slit

M-20
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

1139SBM0800A

8 CLEANING UNIT
The Cleaning Blade is pressed tightly against the surface of the PC Drum and
scrapes off any toner remaining on the surface after image transfer and paper sepa-
ration have been completed.

The Cleaning Blade is moved back and forth to prevent the PC Drum from deterio-
rating and the Cleaning Blade from warping away from the surface of the PC Drum.

There is a Toner Antispill Mylar affixed to the Imaging Unit. It prevents toner scraped
off the surface of the PC Drum from falling down onto the surface of the copy paper
or the paper path.

In addition, a Side Seal and Brush Seal are affixed to both ends of the Imaging Unit
on both sides of the Cleaning Blade. They prevent toner from spilling from both ends
of the Cleaning Blade.

Cleaning Blade Brush Seal

Tension Spring

Side Seal

Toner Antispill Mylar

Blade Lateral
Movement Cam

M-21
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

1151SBM0801A
8-1. Cleaning Bias
*Except the U.S.A., Canada, and Europe

There is a Cleaning Bias Seal installed to minimize damage to the PC Drum from
acid paper.

Toner Antispill Mylar

PC Drum

Cleaning Bias Seal

Control Signal ON OFF WIRING DIAGRAM

Cleaning Bias PWB-A PJ12A-4 L H 31-C

M-22
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

1151SBM0900A

9 TONER HOPPER
1139SBM0901A
9-1. Toner Hopper Locking/Unlocking
The Toner Hopper is not integrated into the Imaging Unit; instead, it is secured to
the copier. To replace an empty Toner Bottle, the user first needs to swing the Toner
Bottle Holder out 40° to the front. The Holder pivots about the Toner Supply Port as
it is swung out or in, which effectively prevents toner from spilling when the Holder
is swung out or in.
Copier Frame

Lock

Toner Replenishing
Motor M8

Toner Supply Port

40°

Toner Bottle Toner Bottle Holder

1151SBM0902A
9-2. Toner Replenishing
D Drive from Toner Replenishing Motor M8 is transmitted via the motor shaft to the Bottle
Cap Claw, which turns the Toner Bottle. As the Toner Bottle is fitted to the Coupling,
both turn together during toner replenishing.
D There is a Metering Chamber provided at the toner supply port of the Coupling. It func-
tions to regulates the amount of toner that falls through the port.
D There is a supply port for the exclusive use of the starter. The starter does not pass
through the Metering Chamber, which means that it takes a shorter time to charge the
starter.
Metering Chamber
Starter
Supply Port Coupling

Opening

1151M018YA
Bottle Cap Claw

Toner Replenishing
Motor M8

M-23
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

1151SBM0903A
9-3. Shutter
The connection between the Toner Hopper and Imaging Unit is provided with a
Shutter which prevents toner from spilling when the Imaging Unit is slid out of the
copier.

Imaging Unit Out of Copier Imaging Unit in Position in Copier

Shutter

Imaging Unit

1151SBM0904A
9-4. Toner Hopper Home Position Detection
Coupling is fitted with a Home Position Plate which is detected by Toner Hopper
Home Position Sensor PC112. This ensures that the Toner Bottle is located so that
its opening is positioned on top whenever M8 is deenergized.

Toner Replenishing Motor M8

Home Position Plate

1151M019AA

Toner Hopper Home

Position Sensor PC112

M-24
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

1139SBM0905A
9-5. Toner Bottle Vibration
When the indentations at three places on the left-hand side (as viewed when the
Toner Bottle is in position) of the Toner Bottle move past the protrusion in the Toner
Bottle Holder, the Toner Bottle is vibrated to prevent some of the toner from
remaining unconsumed in the Bottle.

Toner Bottle

Indentations

Toner Bottle Holder

Protrusion

M-25
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

1151SBM0906A
9-6. Toner Replenishing Control
1. The ATDC Sensor installed in the Imaging Unit reads the toner-to-carrier ratio
of the developer in the Developer Mixing Chamber for each copy cycle.
2. It samples the ratio 16 times and compares each with the preset level.
3. If eight or more readings out of the total 16 are lower than the preset level, a Toner
Replenishing signal is output.
4. Toner Replenishing Motor M8 is turned one complete turn for each Toner
Replenishing signal (which is equivalent to a supply of 0.45 g toner).
*The readings taken while M8 is turning (it takes 5 seconds for M8 to turn one
complete turn) are ignored. This means that, in a multi-copy cycle, the ATDC
Sensor may take readings as the next copy cycle is started while M8 is turning; but,
those readings are ignored.

Control Signal Energized Deenergized WIRING DIAGRAM

M8 PWB-A PJ6A-5 H L 30-E

Control Signal Blocked Unblocked WIRING DIAGRAM

PC112 PWB-A PJ22A-10 L H 30-E

Reference
Control Signal Set T/C Voltage WIRING DIAGRAM

4.0% 2.692
4.5% 2.596
5.0% 2.5
UN3 PWB-A PJ1A-3 5.5% 2.404 30-B
6.0% 2.308
6.5% 2.212
7.0% 2.116

M-26
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

1151SBM1000A

10 DRUM CHARGING
The PC Drum Charge Corona has a Scorotron grid to deposit a negative DC charge
evenly across the surface of the PC Drum. The grid voltage (VG) applied to the grid
mesh is selected between -650V in the normal mode and -520V in the Photo mode
by the Constant-Voltage Circuit in High Voltage Unit HV1.

The Corona Unit has a Comb Electrode which minimizes the amount of ozone
produced. The conventional wire type corona unit produces a large amount of
ozone due to corona discharge in radial directions. The comb electrode type, on the
other hand, discharges only toward the Grid Mesh, meaning a reduced amount of
ozone is produced.

The Comb Electrode can be cleaned by the user who pulls out to the front the shaft
on which a Cleaning Rollar is mounted.

Holder Comb Electrode Spring Holder

Grid Mesh

Control Signal ON OFF WIRING DIAGRAM

PC Drum
PWB-A PJ12A-5 L H 11-E
Charge Corona

Normal
Control Signal Mode Photo Mode WIRING DIAGRAM

Grid Voltage
PWB-A PJ12A-6 L H 11-E
(VG)

M-27
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

1151SBM1100A

11 IMAGE ERASE LAMP

To prevent a black band from occurring across both the leading and trailing edges,
and along the front and rear edges, of the electrostatic latent image, 31 LEDs of
Image Erase Lamp LA3 are turned ON before development takes place, thereby
reducing to a minimum the unnecessary potential on the surface of the PC Drum.
Because of the light path involved, this copier has this edge erasing cycle between
drum charging and exposure.

PC Drum Charge Corona Image Erase Lamp LA3

Exposure

The position of LA3 can be adjusted using the adjusting screw on the front of the
copier.

Copier Front Frame

Copier Rear
Frame Adjusting Screw

Compression LA3 Board LA3 Holder

Coil Spring

M-28
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

The 31 LEDs of LA3 are grouped as shown below. The diagram on the bottom of
this page shows which LEDs turn ON and OFF for different paper sizes and different
zoom ratios.
LED Group No. LED No. LED Group No. LED No.
00 LED 1 10 LED 23
01 LED 2 to 6 11 LED 24
02 LED 7 to 11 12 LED 25
03 LED 12 to 16 13 LED 26
04 LED 17 14 LED 27
05 LED 18 15 LED 28
06 LED 19 16 LED 29
07 LED 20 17 LED 30
08 LED 21 18 LED 31
09 LED 22
*The smaller the number, the nearer the LED is to the front side of the copier.

LED ON/OFF Pattern

Zoom Ratio Paper Width LED Group No.
From - To From - To
Less Than Less Than 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
(%) (mm)
50~53 to 152 f y y y f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f
53~57 152 to 163 f y y y y f f f f f f f f f f f f f f
57~61 163 to 173 f y y y y y f f f f f f f f f f f f f
61~64 173 to 183 f y y y y y y f f f f f f f f f f f f
64~67 183 to 192 f y y y y y y y f f f f f f f f f f f
67~70 192 to 201 f y y y y y y y y f f f f f f f f f f
70~74 201 to 212 f y y y y y y y y y f f f f f f f f f
74~78 212 to 223 f y y y y y y y y y y f f f f f f f f
78~82 223 to 235 f y y y y y y y y y y y f f f f f f f
82~86 235 to 247 f y y y y y y y y y y y y f f f f f f
86~90 247 to 259 f y y y y y y y y y y y y y f f f f f
90~93 259 to 270 f y y y y y y y y y y y y y y f f f f
93~96 270 to 281 f y y y y y y y y y y y y y y y f f f
96~99 281 to 291 f y y y y y y y y y y y y y y y y f f
99~ 291 to f y y y y y y y y y y y y y y y y y f
f:ON; y:OFF
*Max. width (291 mm or more) applies to manual bypass copying in which the copier
is unable to detect paper width.

M-29
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

Control Signal ON OFF WIRING DIAGRAM

LA3 PWB-A PJ17A-4 ~ 9 L H 2-F

M-30
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

1151SBM1200A

12 OPTICAL SECTION
As the Scanner is moved by Scanner Motor M5, the light from Exposure Lamp LA1
is reflected off the original and guided through the four Mirrors onto the surface of
the PC Drum to form the electrostatic latent image.

The image is enlarged or reduced as necessary by changing the position of the

Lens and 4th Mirror and varying the angle of the 4th Mirror.

4th Mirror Mirror Motor M7 Scanner

Lens Motor M6

AE Sensor

2nd/3rd Mirrors
Carriage

Lens

Scanner Motor M5

Scanner Shaft

M-31
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

1151SBM1201A
12-1. Exposure Lamp LA1
An AC halogen lamp is used as Exposure Lamp LA1.

As the exposure level is adjusted on the control panel, the duty ratio of the pulse
of AVR Remote from PWB-A changes to increase or decrease the LA1 voltage,
thereby changing the image density.

In Photo mode, the voltages are varied on a level 5V lower than the manual
Exposure Lamp voltages.
Manual EXP Setting 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Lamp Voltage
–8 –4 –2 –1 Reference +1 +2 +4 +8
Difference (V)

Control Signal ON OFF WIRING DIAGRAM

AVR Remote
PWB-A PJ12A-11 L H 22-F, 22-H
Signal (LA1)
*If reduction copies are made using large size paper, the trailing edge of the first
copy moves past PC51 after the SCEND signal for the second copy has been
generated. If LA1 is turned ON for the second copy at the same timing as the first
one, therefore, the image for the second copy is produced on the trailing edge of
the first copy. To prevent this from occurring, LA1 is turned ON for the second and
subsequent copies when all of the following conditions are met:
D Approx. 0.8 sec. or more have elapsed after the first copy deactivated PC51.
D The PC51 output is HIGH.
D The SCEND signal for the second copy is output.

M-32
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

1151SBM1202A
12-2. AE Sensor
In the Auto Exposure Mode, the AE Sensor on AE Sensor Board PWB-H measures
the intensity of the light reflected off the original, which results in the black/white
ratio of a 210-mm-wide area from the reference position of the original being
measured. According to this measurement, the Exposure Lamp voltage is
automatically increased or decreased so that copies of consistent quality are
produced.

The output from the AE Sensor is applied to PWB-A which, in turn, varies the duty
ratio of the AVR Remote from it to vary accordingly the LA1 voltage.
Original Density (B/W Ratio) High Low
Intensity of Reflected Light Low High
PWB-H Output High Low
AVR Duty Increased Decreased
LA1 Voltage Increased Decreased

Control Signal ON OFF WIRING DIAGRAM

PWB-H
PWB-A PJ2A-3 L H 21-L
(AE Sensor)
AVR Remote
PWB-A PJ12A-11 L H 22-F, 22-H
Signal (LA1)

M-33
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

1151SBM1203A
12-3. Lamp Reflectors
The Main Reflector ensures that light from Exposure Lamp LA1 exposes all areas
of the original. The Auxiliary Reflector functions to reflect light onto the areas that
LA1 cannot illuminate when an original that does not lie flat on the Original Glass
(such as a book) is being used. This reduces shadows which would otherwise be
transferred to the copy.

The Main Reflector is of aluminum, while the Auxiliary Reflector is aluminum to

which film has been deposited. The same film as that used on the Auxiliary
Reflector is affixed to both ends of the frame to compensate for the reduced
intensity of light around both ends of the Exposure Lamp.

Auxiliary Reflector

Main Reflector

Exposure Lamp LA1

1151M021AA

1151SBM1204A
12-4. Aperture Plates
Four Aperture Plates are moved to the front and rear to ensure even light
distribution.

Aperture Plate

1151M020AA

M-34
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

1151SBM1205A
12-5. Scanner and 2nd/3rd Mirror Carriage Movement
The Scanner and 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage are moved by the Scanner Drive Cable
fitted in the rear side of the copier. The Cable is driven by Scanner Motor M5.

Both the Scanner and 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage slide along the Scanner Shaft at the
rear side. While at the front side, there is a Slide Bushing attached to the underside
of each of the bodies and that Bushing slides over the Slide Rail. The speed of the
Scanner and 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage varies with different zoom ratios.

Scanner Reference Position Sensor PC81 detects the home position of the
Scanner and 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage. If they are not at the home position when
the copier is turned ON, M5 is energized to move them to the home position.

2nd/3rd Mirrors
Carriage

Scanner

Slide Rail

Scanner Shaft
Scanner
Reference
Position
Sensor PC81

Scanner Motor M5

Scanner Drive Cable

1151M022YA

M-35
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

The Scanner starts the scan motion as a Scan Sel signal (PJ16A-3) is output from
PWB-A. At the start of a scan motion and other heavy load conditions, Scanner
Motor M5 requires a large amount of current. The Current 1 or 2 signal (PJ16A-10
or 11) from PWB-A is selected accordingly to vary the amount of current supplied
to M5.

*The Current signal selection timing is controlled by software.

Current 1 H L L
Current 2 H H L
Current Approx. 0.6A Approx. 0.7A Approx. 0.9A
When the scan At scan start and At return start and
speed reaches a when the return at scan start for low
given level and speed reaches a zoom ratio
during return braking. given level.

On receiving the Scan Sel signal, Motor Drive Board PWB-E applies motor drive
pulses, which are out-of-phase with each other, to M5. The motor speed is varied
by changing the width of the pulses applied to M5.
Control Signal Energized Deenergized WIRING DIAGRAM
M5
PWB-A PJ16A-3 L H
Sel Signal
M5
Current
PWB-A PJ16A-10 L H
Switching
22-J
Signal 1
M5
Current
PWB-A PJ16A-11 L H
Switching
Signal 2

Control Signal Blocked Unblocked WIRING DIAGRAM

PC81 PWB-A PJ22A-1 L H 20-N

M-36
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

1151SBM1206A
12-6. 4th Mirror Movement
The 4th Mirror is moved to vary the conjugate distance for a particular zoom ratio
by driving the rack-and-pinion gears at the front and rear ends of the mirror using
Mirror Motor M7 (stepping motor). The Levers of the Holder to which the Mirror is
mounted slides along a tilted rail to change the Mirror angle. This ensures that the
light strikes the surface of the PC Drum in the direction of the normal, thereby
preventing resolution from being degraded.

Mirror Reference Position Sensor PC81 is used to control the position of the 4th
Mirror. It ensures that the Mirror is located at the home position when the copier is
turned ON.

Levers

Drive Shaft
4th Mirror
Mirror
Motor
M7

Tilt Adjusting Screw

Lever

Control Signal Energized Deenergized WIRING DIAGRAM

M7 PWB-A PJ16A-2 L H 19-I

Control Signal Blocked Unblocked WIRING DIAGRAM

PC86 PWB-A PJ20A-2 L H 20-M

M-37
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

1151SBM1207B
12-7. Lens Movement
The Lens is moved by the Lens Drive Cable which is driven by Lens Motor M6 (step-
ping motor). The motor drive pulses sent from PWB-E drive M6 to move the Lens
a given distance, corresponding to the zoom ratio, from the reference position de-
termined by Lens Reference Position Sensor PC90.

There is a fixed-type Lens Aperture Cover provided at the rear of the Lens (on the
4th Mirror end). It limits the amount of light striking the surface of the PC Drum.

Lens Reference Position Sensor PC90

Lens Base Bracket

Lens
Shaft Lens Aperture
Cover

Spring Cam

Lens Drive Cable

Lens Motor M6

1151M023AA

Lens

1149M010AA
Lens Aperture Cover

Control Signal Energized Deenergized WIRING DIAGRAM

M6 PWB-A PJ16A-1 L H 19-I

Control Signal Blocked Unblocked WIRING DIAGRAM

PC90 PWB-A PJ20A-5 L H 20-M

M-38
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

1151SBM1300A

13 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTING SENSORS (EP2010 ONLY)

1151SBM1301A
13-1. Original Size Detecting Sensors
The Original Size Detecting Sensors are mounted only in the copiers for the
following marketing areas. The number and location of these sensors vary
depending on the marketing area.

Area T: Taiwan, Curaceau, Saudi Arabia (120V Area)

Area E: Europe, Australia, New Zealand, South Africa
Area H: Hong Kong, South Africa, Singapore, Malaysia, Indonesia, Saudi Arabia
(220-240V Area)
Area P: Philippines, Pakistan, Central and South America (220V Area)

The two (four only for area H) fixed sensors installed in the Optical Section receive
the light reflected off the original to determine the size of the original in the Auto
Paper and Auto Size Mode.

Image density of the original (OD) that can be detected is 0.6 or less (except for
transparencies, translucent paper, and an original that does not lie flat).

Original Size Detecting Sensor (CD) Original Size Detecting Sensor (FD)

Original Size Detecting Board UN2

M-39
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

Each sensor has two LEDs and one photo receiver. When the Original Cover is
raised, the photo receiver detects light from the two LEDs reflected off the original
to determine whether there is an original placed on the Original Glass. The
combination in which the sensors are activated and deactivated determines the
size of the original, as checked by Original Size Detecting Board UN2. The original
size data is transmitted as 4-bit parallel data to PWB-A when the Start Key is
pressed (Original Cover is raised) or Original Cover Detecting Sensor PC111 is
activated (Cover angle less than 15°).
Original

Photo
Receiver LED

Original Size Detecting Sensor

The number and location of the sensors vary depending on the marketing area as
detailed below.
PC113 (FD2) A B C
PC114 (CD1)
PC115 (FD3) *Area H only
PC116 (CD2) *Area H only
A5
NOTE: Layout of FD Sensors
Area T: A (FD2)
Area E: B (FD2) B5
Area H: B (FD2) and CD1 A4 FLS (8.5”13”)
C (FD3) LTR (8.5”11”)
B4
Area P: B (FD2) LTR (11”85”)
A3
CD2

Original Sizes That Can be Detected:

Original Sizes Detection

Area T A5L, B5L, B5C, A4L, A4C, A3L
Area E A5L, A4L, A4C, B4L, A3L, 8-1/2” 11”
A5L, A4L, A4C, B4L, A3L, 8-1/2” 11”, 8” 13”, 8-1/4” 13”
Area H
8-1/2” 13”, 11” 8-1/2”, 8-1/2” 14”, 11” 17”
Area P 5-1/2” 8-1/2”, 8-1/2” 11”, 11” 8-1/2”, 8-1/2” 14”, 11” 17”

M-40
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

1151SBM1400A

14 MAIN ERASE LAMP

Main Erase Lamp LA2 is turned ON to neutralize any surface potential remaining
on the surface of the PC Drum after cleaning.

Mounting Bracket Main Erase Lamp LA2

PC Drum
Slit

LA2 consists of ten tungsten-filament lamps mounted on a Board.

Slit

Copier
Tungsten-Filament Lamp Front Frame
Mounting Bracket

Control Signal ON OFF WIRING DIAGRAM

LA2 PWB-A PJ1A-7 H L 31-C

M-41
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

1151SBM1500A

15 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION

Image Transfer
The Image Transfer Corona applies a DC negative corona emission to the
underside of the paper thereby attracting the positively charged toner onto the
surface of the paper to form a visible, developed image of the original. The Corona
Unit is provided with a Corona Wire cleaning mechanism: the operator has only to
pull out the Lever on which the Cleaner is mounted from the front of the copier, which
cleans the Wire.

Paper Separation
The Paper Separator Corona showers the underside of the paper with both positive
and negative charges so that the paper can be easily separated from the PC Drum.
In addition, two Paper Separator Fingers physically peel the paper off the surface
of the PC Drum. (For details, see PAPER SEPARATOR FINGERS.)

The Image Transfer/Paper Separator Coronas Unit is provided with a Pre-Image

Transfer Guide Plate that determines the angle at which the paper comes into
contact with the PC Drum and keeps an optimum distance between the paper and
the PC Drum so that the image may be properly transferred onto the paper.

PC Drum

Housing

Pre-Image Transfer
Guide Plate
Paper Separator Image Transfer
Corona Wire Corona Wire

Cleaner Lever Cleaner

M-42
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

Control Signal ON OFF WIRING DIAGRAM

Image Transfer
PWB-A PJ12A-5 L H 11-E
Corona
Paper Separator
PWB-A PJ12A-4 L H 11-E
Corona

M-43
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

1151SBM1600A

16 PAPER SEPARATOR FINGERS

After image transfer, an AC corona emission is applied to the underside of the paper
by the Paper Separator Corona to neutralize the paper so that it can be easily
separated from the PC Drum. To further ensure that the paper is positively
separated from the PC Drum, there are two Paper Separator Fingers attached to
the Imaging Unit. They physically peel the paper off the surface of the PC Drum.

To prevent the Paper Separator Fingers from damaging the surface of the PC Drum,
they are kept in the retracted position whenever they are not at work. As illustrated
below, the Fingers are brought into contact with, and retracted from, the surface of
the PC Drum by the Lever which is operated by Separator Solenoid SL1.
Where Fingers are in Where Fingers are
Contact with PC Drum Retracted from PC Drum
Lever Pressure Spring

Holder
Separator Finger

The Paper Separator Fingers are also moved over a given distance to the front and
rear so that they will contact wider areas of the surface of the PC Drum, thus
preventing localized damage to the PC Drum surface. This lateral movement is
done by the Lever connected to the Cleaning Blade and, when the Cleaning Blade
is moved, the Separator Fingers are also moved back and forth.
*Lateral Movement: 3.7 mm

Cleaning Blade

Lever
Holder

100 mm 80 mm

Finger Positions Paper Path

Reference Position

M-44
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

Control Signal Energized Deenergized WIRING DIAGRAM

SL1 PWB-A PJ14A-2 L H 14-A

M-45
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

1151SBM1700A

17 PAPER TAKE-UP/FEED SECTION (2ND DRAWER: EP2010 ONLY)

The copier is equipped with two Paper Drawers, 1st and 2nd, that can be slid out
to the front of the copier. Each can hold up to 250 sheets of paper.

The 1st Drawer is a universal paper size type, while the 2nd Drawer is a fixed paper
size type.

Paper Take-up
Paper Take-Up Sensors
Solenoids
1st Drawer Set
Paper Empty Sensors
Detecting Switch
S65
Marketing 1st Drawer
Area Switch (Universal Paper Size)
Paper Size Paper
2nd Drawer
Detecting Switches Take-Up Rolls
(Fixed Paper Size)

2nd Drawer Set

Sensor PC69

Paper Sizes That Can be Loaded

Marketing
Area 1st Drawer 2nd Drawer
Switch
S66
5.5”8.5”, 8.5”11”, 8.5”14”, 8.5”11” [LETTER], 11”8.5”
11”8.5”, 11”14”, 11”17” [LETTER], 8.5”13” [G.LEGAL],
Inch 8.5”14” [LEGAL],
11”17”, 5.5”8.5” [INVOICE],
Inch 
8”10.5” [G.LETTER]
Areas A5L, A4L, A4C, A3L 10.5”8” [G.LETTER], 8”13”,
8”13”, 8.5”13” [G.LEGAL] 10”14”, 11”14”, 210280,
Metric 8-1/4”13” 280210, 216297, 216320,
220280, 220330, 280420,
210330

M-46
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

Marketing
Area 1st Drawer 2nd Drawer
Switch
S66
A3L, B4L, A4L, A4C, A5L, B5C, A3L, B4L, A4L, A4C, A5L, 8”13”
Metric B5L (Taiwan Only), 8”  13”, A5L, 10”8” [QUARTO], 210280,
Metric 8.5”  13”], 8-1/4”  13” 216297, 297216, 216320,
Areas 220280, 297430, 210330
5.5”8.5” [INVOICE],
Inch 8.5”11” [LETTER]],
8.5”14” [LEGAL]], 11”17”]
]Except Taiwan

1151SBM1701A
17-1. Edge Guide and Trailing Edge Stop
1st Drawer
The 1st Drawer is a universal type allowing the user to slide freely the Edge Guide
and Trailing Edge Stop to accommodate paper of different sizes.

The Edge Guide and Trailing Edge Stop can be locked into position by meshing the
notches in the Lock Lever with those in the Drawer.

Drawer Side
Lock Lever

Trailing Edge Stop Edge Guide

2nd Drawer
The 2nd Drawer is a fixed paper size type, in which the Edge Guide and Trailing
Edge Stop are screwed into fixed positions.

The Edge Guide is provided with an Edge Pad (which is Velcro) that prevents
double feed and ensures that the paper stack keeps its correct alignment with
regard to the paper path reference position.

M-47
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

1151SBM1702A
17-2. Drawer Positioning
Each of the 1st and 2nd Drawers is positioned by fitting its Positioning Plate on the
paper take-up end into the groove in the Drawer Frame. It is then secured in position
by the magnet installed in the Drawer Front Cover on the paper take-up end. The
tabs on both sides at the front of the Drawer ensure that the Drawer clicks into
position. Any deviation in the paper path reference position can be adjusted within
"2 mm by moving the Front Cover of the Drawer to the front or rear.
Tab Rear End

Positioning
Plate

Front End
Position
Plate

1151M024AA

1151SBM1703A
17-3. Paper Lifting Plate
The Paper Lifting Plate of each Drawer is raised at all times by two Paper Lifting
Springs.

For the 2nd Drawer, the type and position of the Paper Lifting Springs must be
changed according to the paper size. (For details, see DIS/REASSEMBLY,
ADJUSTMENT.)

Paper Lifting Plate

Paper Lifting Springs

M-48
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

1151SBM1704A
17-4. Drawer-in-Position Detection
The copier detects that the Drawer is slid into position as follows.

1st Drawer
When the 1st Drawer is slid into the copier, the Drawer Frame presses 1st Drawer
Set Detecting Switch S65 installed on the back panel of the copier.

2nd Drawer
When the 2nd Drawer is slid into the copier, the Rib on the Drawer Frame blocks
2nd Drawer Set Sensor PC69.
Paper Size
Detecting Switches
1st Drawer Set
Detecting Switches S65

S61 S62S63

Drawer Frame

2nd Drawer Set Sensor PC69

<Control>
Control Signal ON OFF WIRING DIAGRAM
S65 PWB-A PJ9A-13 L H 25-G

Control Signal Blocked Unblocked WIRING DIAGRAM

PC69 PWB-A PJ10A-2 L H 25-K

M-49
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

1151SBM1705A
17-5. Universal Tray (1st Drawer) Paper Size Detection
The length (feeding direction) and width (crosswise direction) of the paper are
independently detected and the copier determines the paper size by combining the
two separate detections made.

On the bottom of the tray are a lever fitted to the Trailing Edge Stop and another
lever fitted to the Edge Guide. These levers actuate and deactuate Paper Size
Detecting Switches S61, S62, S63, and S64 to allow the copier to determine a
particular paper size.

Marketing Area Switch S66 is used to set the type of paper to be used (inch or metric).

S62
S66 S61 S63 Drawer Set Detecting
S64 Switch S65

NOTE
The number and the installed position of the
Paper Take-Up Rolls vary depending on the
marketing areas: inch or metric. See pp. M-46
and M-47 for the sizes of the paper that can be
taken up and fed out of the drawer.

1151M003AA

Paper Size Detecting Switches Inch/Metric Setting Switch S66

Length (FD) Width (CD) Paper Length
Metric Inch
S61 S62 S63 S64
ON ON ON - ~402.0 A3 11”  17”
OFF 8-1/2”  14”
ON ON OFF 402.0~349.2 B4
ON 11”  14”
OFF 8-1/2”  14”
ON OFF OFF 349.4~317.2 FLS
ON 11”  14”
OFF OFF OFF - 317.2~272.0 A4L Letter L
OFF Letter L
OFF OFF ON 272.0~222.0 B5L
ON Letter C
OFF A5L Invoice L
OFF ON ON 222.0~195.0
ON A4L Letter C
OFF Letter C
OFF ON OFF 195.0~ B5C
ON Letter L

The 2nd Drawer accepts only paper of a fixed size and has no paper size detecting
system. (The paper size is input from the control panel using a Tech. Rep. Mode.)

M-50
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

<Control>
Control Signal ON OFF WIRING DIAGRAM
S61 PWB-A PJ9A-1 L H 25-D
S62 PWB-A PJ9A-4 L H 25-E
S63 PWB-A PJ9A-7 L H 25-E
S64 PWB-A PJ9A-10 L H 25-F
S66 PWB-A PJ10A-4 L H 25-G

1151SBM1706A
17-6. Paper Empty Detection
When the Drawer runs out of paper, the Actuator for the Paper Empty Sensor drops
into the cutout in the Paper Lifting Plate. This activates the Paper Empty Sensor and
the copier will know that the Drawer has run out of paper.

As we noted earlier, the Paper Lifting Plate is raised at all times by the Paper Lifting
Springs. To prevent the Actuator for the Paper Empty Sensor (PC101 for the 1st
Drawer and PC102 for the 2nd Drawer) from being caught by the paper stack when
the Drawer is slid out of the copier, therefore, it is tilted slightly. This, however,
results in the operating stroke of the Actuator becoming small, which increases the
possibility of the Actuator activating the Sensor by flexing of a sheet of paper as it
is taken up and fed in. To prevent this false detection a paper-empty condition, the
paper empty detection is enabled only when the Paper Take-Up Roll is in the
retracted position. (See 17-8. ”Paper Take-Up Roll” for the retracted position of the
Paper Take-Up Roll.)

Paper Empty Sensor

Actuator

<Control>
Control Signal Blocked Unblocked WIRING DIAGRAM
PC101 PWB-A PJ7A-6 L H 25-B
PC102 PWB-A PJ8A-4 L H 25-J

M-51
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

1151SBM1707A
17-7. Paper Separating Mechanism
Each Drawer has Fingers that function to separate the top sheet of paper from the
rest of the paper stack at paper take-up. The Fingers are fitted to the right front and
rear corners of the Drawer. When the Paper Take-Up Roll starts turning to take up
the top sheet of paper, its turning force is directly transmitted to the top sheet of pa-
per as it is in direct contact with the Paper Take-Up Roll. That force overcomes the
block of the Fingers, causing the top sheet of paper to ride over the Fingers and be
fed out of the Drawer into the copier.

As to the second sheet of paper, the paper transport force obtained through friction
with the top sheet of paper is weak and does not allow the second sheet of paper
to ride over the block of the Fingers. Hence, the second sheet of paper remains
stationary with the rest of the paper stack in the Drawer.

When there are only two sheets of paper left in the Drawer, the bottom sheet can
be fed with the top one if the friction of the Paper Lifting Plate is weak. The Friction
Plate affixed to the Paper Lifting Plate prevents this from happening.

Paper Take-Up Roll

Paper

Separator Finger

Friction Plate Paper Lifting Plate

M-52
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

1151SBM1708A
17-8. Paper Take-Up Roll
Since the Paper Lifting Plate is raised at all times by the Paper Lifting Springs, paper
is wedged in the mechanism when the Drawer is slid out of the copier if the Paper
Take-Up Roll is round in shape. So the Take-Up Roll is semicircular and the circular
part of the Roll is positioned on top at times other than take-up. For convenience,
we call this position of the Paper Take-Up Roll the ”retracted” position.

The Paper Take-Up Roll is grooved to keep good friction even under heavy loading.
The 1st Drawer, which is a universal type to accommodate paper of different sizes,
is provided with five (four in areas using only inch paper) Paper Take-Up Rolls. The
2nd Drawer accommodating paper of a fixed size only is equipped with two Rolls
whose positions must be changed according to the paper size. (For the positions,
see DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT.)

The Paper Take-Up Roll is driven when the Paper Take-Up Solenoid (SL2 for the
1st Drawer and SL3 for the 2nd Drawer) is energized. The Roll is turned one
complete turn for each single sheet of paper.

The Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC55 for the 1st Drawer and PC56 for the 2nd Drawer)
is used to detect whether a sheet of paper has been properly taken up or not.

Paper Take-Up Solenoid

Paper Take-Up Roll Ratchet

Ratchet
1151M025AA

Vertical Transport Roller

Paper Take-Up Sensor

Actuator

M-53
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

Control Signal Energized Deenergized WIRING DIAGRAM

SL2 PWB-A PJ7A-9 L H 25-C
SL3 PWB-A PJ8A-2 L H 25-I

Control Signal Blocked Unblocked WIRING DIAGRAM

PC55 PWB-A PJ7A-2 H L 25-B
PC56 PWB-A PJ8A-7 H L 25-J

1151SBM1709A
17-9. Paper Take-Up Retry Control
To minimize the occurrence of paper misfeed due to a slippery Paper Take-Up Roll,
the Paper Take-Up Solenoid is energized a second time if a sheet of paper fails to
reach the Paper Take-Up Detecting Sensor within T sec. after the solenoid has
been deenergized. The solenoid is energized a second time 0.5 sec. after the
above-mentioned period of T sec. has elapsed. (This is referred to as the paper
take-up retry function.)

A misfeed results if the sheet of paper does not reach the Paper Take-Up Detecting
Sensor even after the three paper take-up sequences.

Here is the control timing chart.

1 st Drawer 2nd Drawer

T 1.3 sec. 1.6 sec.

M-54
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

1151SBM1800A

18 VERTICAL PAPER TRANSPORT

The sheet of paper taken up by the Paper Take-Up Roll from the Drawer is fed along
the Paper Guide to the Vertical Transport Rollers. The paper fed by the Vertical
Transport Rollers reaches the Transport Rollers and is then fed up to the
Synchronizing Rollers. The Transport Rollers are turned and stopped by Paper
Transport Clutch CL2. Transport Roller Sensor PC51 immediately before the
Transport Rollers detects a sheet of paper fed from the Vertical Transport Section
or Manual Bypass Table.

The Cover for the Vertical Transport Section (i.e., the Side Door) can be opened and
closed for clearing misfeeds. Side Door Detecting Sensor PC57 detects whether
or not this Cover is open.
<EP2010> <EP1083>

Transport Transport
Rollers Rollers
Side Door Side Door
Actuator Detecting Actuator Detecting
Transport Roller Sensor PC57 Transport Roller Sensor PC57
Sensor PC51 Sensor PC51
Vertical
Vertical Transport
Transport Rollers/Rolls.
Rollers/Rolls.
1142M006AA

1139M067AA

<Control>

Control Signal Energized Deenergized WIRING DIAGRAM

M2 PWB-A PJ12A-10 L H 5-F
CL2 PWB-A PJ6A-2 L H 2-M

Control Signal Blocked Unblocked WIRING DIAGRAM

PC54 PWB-A PJ18A-2 L H 14-D

M-55
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

1151SBM1900B

19 SYNCHRONIZING ROLLERS
The Synchronizing Rollers, operating in phase with the Scanners’ scan motion and
paper feeding, synchronize the leading edge of the copy paper accurately with the
leading edge of the toner image on the PC Drum.

The Upper Synchronizing Roller is a metal roller covered with a polyvinyl chloride
tubing, while the Lower one is a rubber roller.

Synchronizing
Upper Synchronizing Roller Roller Clutch CL1

Lower Synchronizing Roller

Paper Leading Edge Detecting

Sensor PC54
1151M026AA

To facilitate clearing of misfeeds, the Upper Synchronizing Roller is installed in the

Imaging Unit. It is fitted to the Guide Frame of the Imaging Unit and the
Compression Springs at the front and rear ends press the Roller downward so that
it makes contact with the Lower Synchronizing Roller. The Lower Roller is driven
by the drive source, while there is a gear train that transmits the rotation of the Lower
Roller to the Upper Roller, thus ensuring good paper transport performance.

To ensure good image transfer during conditions of high humidity, the Pre-Synch
Guide Plate is electrically floated by a plastic spacer, grounded through an 82MΩ
resistor and 1kV varistor.

Upper Synchronizing Roller

Compression Spring

Pre-Image Transfer
Guide Frame
Guide Plate
Pre-Synch Guide Plate
Paper Leading Edge
Detecting Sensor PC54
Lower Synchronizing Roller
Actuator

M-56
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

1151SBM1901A
19-1. Upper Synchronizing Roller Positioning
Since the Upper Synchronizing Roller is fitted to the Imaging Unit, it must be
correctly positioned with reference to the Lower Synchronizing Roller when the
Upper Half of the copier is swung down into the locked position. For this purpose,
slits are cut in the lower copier frame and the Bushings of the Upper Synchronizing
Roller fit into these slits.

The Upper Synchronizing Roller is grounded through the Bushings which are in
contact with the frame. To positively ground the Roller, the Ground Plate fitted to the
lower frame makes contact with the Shaft of the Upper Synchronizing Roller.

Upper Synchronizing shaft

Lower Copier Frame

Ground Plate
1151M027YA

1139SBM1902A
19-2. Paper Dust Remover
The Paper Dust Remover is installed so that it makes contact with the Upper
Synchronizing Roller. Since the Upper Synchronizing Roller is covered with a vinyl
tubing, triboelectric charging occurs as the Roller turns in contact with the Paper
Dust Remover. As paper is then fed between the Synchronizing Rollers, the
charges on the tubing attract paper dust from the paper. The dust is then transferred
onto the Paper Dust Remover.

Paper Dust Remover

Upper Synchronizing Roller

Lower Synchronizing Roller

M-57
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

1151SBM1903A
19-3. Synchronizing Roller Control
The Synchronizing Rollers are started as Synchronizing Roller Clutch CL1 is
energized upon reception of a signal from PWB-A.

Control Signal Energized Deenergized WIRING DIAGRAM

CL1 PWB-A PJ6A-4 L H 2-N

Control Signal Blocked Unblocked WIRING DIAGRAM

PC54 PWB-A PJ18A-2 L H 14-D

M-58
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

1151SBM2000A

20 PAPER TRANSPORT
After having gone through the image transfer and paper separation processes, the
paper is then transported to the Fusing Unit by the Suction Belts of the Suction Deck
driven directly by Main Drive Motor M2.

Suction Fan Motor M4 draws the paper onto the turning Suction Belts for positive
transport of the paper.

Suction Fan Motor M4

Suction Belts

1151M005AA

Control Signal Energized Deenergized WIRING DIAGRAM

M2 PWB-A PJ12A-10 L H 5-F
M4 PWB-A PJ6A-8 L H 2-O

M-59
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

1151SBM2100A

21 FUSING UNIT
The Upper Fusing Roller and Lower Fusing Roller together apply heat and pressure
to the toner and paper to permanently fix the developed image to the paper.

Drive for the Upper Fusing Roller is transmitted from the Main Drive Motor to the
Upper Fusing Roller Drive Gear. The Lower Fusing Roller, Cleaning Roller and Oil
Roller are driven by the respective Rollers in contact with them.

Fusing Thermistor TH1

Fusing Thermoswitch
Fusing Heater Lamp H1
Paper Exit Roll

Upper Fusing Roller

Lower Fusing Roller

Oil Roller Pressure Spring Cleaning Roller 1151M011AA

Paper Exit Roller Drive Gear

Upper Fusing Roller Drive Gear 1151M007AA

M-60
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

1151SBM2101A
21-1. Fusing Temperature Control
The Upper Fusing Roller is heated by Fusing Heater Lamp H1 which is an AC
halogen lamp. Fusing Thermistor TH1 installed on the Upper Fusing Roller helps
keep the optimum fusing temperature.

The fusing temperature is normally controlled at 195°C. To ensure good fusing

performance, however, even when the Lower Fusing Roller remains cool
immediately after warm-up in the early morning, the temperature is controlled as
follows when the copier is turned ON:
*If the initial fusing temperature is less than 90°C:
Temperature is controlled at 205°C for 10 min. after the copier has completed
warming up, which is followed by a temperature control at 195°C.
*If the initial fusing temperature is less than 150°C:
Temperature is controlled at 205°C for 1 min. after the copier has completed
warming up, which is followed by a temperature control at 195°C.
*If the initial fusing temperature is more than 150°C:
Temperature is controlled at 195°C after the copier has completed warming up.

TH1 is positioned at a point 84 mm from the paper path reference position, thereby
preventing offset caused by low temperature and degraded fusing performance for
small-size paper.

The control temperature in the Energy Saving Mode is 100°C.

Fusing Thermoswitch TS1, installed above the Upper Fusing Roller, cuts off the
power to the Fusing Unit if the temperature of the Upper Fusing Roller becomes
excessively high. It eliminates the possibility of a fire that could occur when H1
remains ON due to a faulty temperature control circuit.

M-61
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

1151SBM2102A
21-2. Fusing Rollers Pressure Mechanism
Pressure Springs are installed at both ends of the Lower Fusing Roller. These
springs contact the bearings mounted on both ends of the Lower Fusing Roller and
exert pressure through the Lower Fusing Roller to the Upper Fusing Roller which
is installed in the Fusing Unit.

The Fusing Unit is divided into an upper and a lower half, and the upper half can
be swung open. The Upper Half of the copier, when locked in position, presses the
upper half of the Fusing Unit down onto its lower half.

Upper Copier Frame

Upper Fusing Roller

Lower Fusing Roller

Pressure Spring

1151SBM2103A
21-3. Oil Roller/Cleaning Roller
A felt-type silicone Oil Roller is pressed up against the Lower Fusing Roller by the
Torsion Springs fitted on the bushings on both ends of the Oil Roller. The Oil Roller
applies a coat of silicone oil to the surface of the Lower Fusing Roller. From there,
it is transferred to the surface of the Upper Fusing Roller to help prevent toner from
being melted onto the surface of the Upper Fusing Roller.

The Cleaning Roller is pressed against the surface of the Lower Fusing Roller, thus
assisting cleaning of the fusing rollers.

Upper Fusing Roller

Lower Fusing Roller

Cleaning Roller
Oil Roller 1151M008AA

M-62
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

1151SBM2200A

22 EXIT UNIT
The Paper Exit Roller/Rolls feed the paper, to which the developed image has been
fixed, out of the Fusing Unit onto the Copy Tray. The Charge Neutralizing Brush
touches the surface of the sheet of paper being fed out of the Fusing Unit to
neutralize any static charge left on it. The Upper and Lower Separator Fingers strip
the paper from the surface of the Upper/Lower Fusing Roller.

Paper Exit Roll

Charge Neutralizing Brush

Upper Separator Finger

Paper Exit Roller

Lower Separator Finger

1139SBM2201A
22-1. Upper/Lower Separator Fingers
The Upper and Lower Separator Fingers are laid out as shown below to cope with
many different paper sizes.

A5
A3 A4 B6
B4 B5 A6

273 231 158 106 19 Paper Path Reference

250.6 175.6 122.6 36.6 Position
*Unit: mm
Upper Lower Separator Fingers
Separator
Fingers

M-63
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

1151SBM2202B
22-2. Paper Exit Sensor
1st Paper Exit Sensor PC53 installed in the paper exit section of the lower half of
the copier detects the sheet of paper being fed out of the Fusing Unit onto the Copy
Tray.

Actuator

Paper Exit Roller

1st Paper Exit Sensor PC53

Control Signal Blocked Unblocked WIRING DIAGRAM

PC53 PWB-A PJ21A-2 L H 14-F

M-64
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

1139SBM2300B

23 EXIT/DUPLEX SWITCHING UNIT (OPTION)

If the copier is configured with an optional Sorter or Staple Sorter, or Duplex Unit
(installed in the Cabinet), the Exit/Duplex Switching Unit must be fitted to the exit
section of the copier.

Exit/Duplex Switching Plate

Drive Transmitting Gear

(coupled to a gear in the Exit
Section of the copier)

Main Control Board PWB-A outputs a signal to energize Exit/Duplex Switching

Solenoid SL61, which switches the position of the Exit/Duplex Switching Plate. The
Unit has 2nd Paper Exit Sensor2 PC30 built into it which detects a sheet of paper
being fed out of the Unit. (For more details of switching control, see the Service
Manual for ”DUPLEXING UNIT.”)

2nd Paper Exit Sensor2 PC30

Paper Exit Roller/Rolls

Exit/Duplex Switching Plate

Exit/Duplex Switching Solenoid SL61

M-65
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

1151SBM2400A

24 DEHUMIDIFYING SWITCH (OPTION)

To prevent image transfer efficiency from being reduced due to damp paper in
highly humid weather, Paper Dehumidifying Heater H3 is installed on the base
frame of the copier under the 2nd Drawer.

While, Drum Dehumidifying Heater H2 is located under the Lower Synchronizing

Roller to prevent the PC Drum from forming condensation.

Lower Synchronizing
Paper Take-Up Rolls
Roller

Base frame
Drum Serviceman
Switch S3 Paper Dehumidifying Heater H3
Dehumidifying
Heater H2

D H2, H3 ON/OFF Conditions

Serviceman Switch ON
Power cord Plugged in Power Switch ON *During a copy cycle
H2 ON OFF OFF
H3 ON ON OFF
*During a copy cycle: Refers to the period of time between when the Start Key is pressed
and when Main Drive Motor M2 is deenergized.

M-66
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

1151SBM2500A

25 MULTI BYPASS TABLE MB-4

The optional Multi Bypass Table permits the user to make multiple copies (up to 50)
on paper that cannot be fed automatically via any built-in paper drawer of the copier.
*Standard on EP2010, optional on EP1083.

Lever

Paper Empty
Sensor
(MB-4) PC32

Paper Take-Up
Clutch (MB-4)
CL51
Paper Take-Up Solenoid (MB-4) SL51
Paper Take-Up Roll

M-67
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

1151SBM2501A
25-1. Paper Take-Up Mechanism
The Paper Take-Up Rolls are normally in their raised (retracted) position so that
they will not hamper proper loading of paper. When the Start Key is pressed, Paper
Take-Up Solenoid (MB-4) SL51 is deenergized causing the Paper Take-Up Rolls
to press the paper stack downward and take up a sheet of paper.

There are Paper Stoppers provided that block the leading edge of the paper stack
as it is loaded on the Table, preventing any portion of the leading edge of the paper
from getting inside. These Stoppers are unlocked at paper take-up, allowing paper
into the copier.

Paper Take-Up Clutch (MB-4) CL51 controls the turning and stop of the Paper Take-
Up Rolls.

In Standby Lever
Lock Levers

Rack Gear
Paper Take-Up
Rolls
Paper Take-Up
Solenoid (MB-4) SL51

Paper Stoppers

At Take-Up

M-68
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

Control Signal Energized Deenergized WIRING DIAGRAM

CL51 PWB-A PJ11A-4 L H 30-G
SL51
PWB-A PJ11A-2 L H
Down
30-G
SL51
PWB-A PJ11A-3 L H
UP

M-69
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

1151SBM2502A
25-2. Paper Separating Mechanism
The paper separating mechanism ensures that only the top sheet of paper is fed
in by separating the second sheet of paper from the top one. This is accomplished
by the Torque Limiter fitted to the Separator Roll shaft which stops the Separator
Roll when there is a change in friction between the Feed and Separator Rolls.

1. At the Time of Double Feed:

The top sheet of paper is fed into the copier by the Feed Roll. Since the
coefficient of friction between the top and second sheet of paper is smaller than
that between the second sheet of paper and the Separator Roll, the two sheets
of paper slip and the second sheet of paper is not fed into the copier. The driving
force of the Feed Roll is at this time consumed by the two slipping sheets of paper
and not transmitted to the Separator Roll which is stopped by its Torque Limiter.
In other words, the force of the Torque Limiter is greater than the driving force
of the Feed Roll as it is transmitted through the two sheets of paper.

Feed Roll

Separator Roll
*Stationary in this condition.

2. Normal Feeding:
The friction coefficient on the top side of the paper is equivalent to that on the
underside. Hence, the driving force of the Feed Roll is directly transmitted to the
Separator Roll through the paper, causing the Separator Roll to be turned by the
Feed Roll. In other words, the force of the Torque Limiter is smaller than the driv-
ing force of the Feed Roll as it is transmitted through the paper.

M-70
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

1151SBM2503A
25-3. Paper Empty Detection
The Multi Bypass Table is equipped with Paper Empty Sensor (MB-4) PC31 which
detects a sheet of paper at the manual bypass port.

Paper Empty Sensor

(MB-4) PC31

Paper Take-Up Roll

Paper Stopper

Actuator

Control Signal Blocked Unblocked WIRING DIAGRAM

PC31 PWB-A PJ11A-6 L H 30-H

M-71
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

1151SBM2600A

26 ORIGINAL COVER ANGLE DETECTION EP2010 ONLY

Original Cover Detecting Sensor PC111 detects the angle of the Original Cover as
it is raised. The following control is provided.

Original Cover raised to an angle of 15° or more:

The size of the original is read by the Original Size Detecting Sensors.

Original Cover raised to an angle of less than 15°:

When PC111 is activated, the original size data is latched and Original Size
Detecting Board UN2 transmits the size data to PWB-A. As soon as Size Reset
Switch S108 is turned ON, the size data is validated and the paper size is shown
on the control panel.

The paper size selected is reset when S108 is turned OFF.

*The Original Cover Angle Detecting System is available only on copiers for Japan,
ROC, South Africa, Singapore, Malaysia, Indonesia, Saudi Arabia, Curacao,
Australia, and New Zealand. The copiers for any other areas are not provided with
the Original Size Detecting Sensors and S108 is used for the detection of raising
and lowering an Automatic/Duplexing Document Feeder (option).

Original Cover Detecting

Magnet Sensor PC111
Size Reset
Switch S108

Control Signal Blocked Unblocked WIRING DIAGRAM

PC111 PWB-A PJ22A-6 L H 20-O

Control Signal ON OFF WIRING DIAGRAM

S108 PWB-A PJ14A-3 L H 20-P

M-72
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

1151SBM2700A

27 COOLING FAN
Ozone produced by the PC Drum Charge Corona and Image Transfer/Paper
Separator Coronas is drawn out of the copier by Cooling Fan Motor M9 and
absorbed by the Ozone Filter.

M9 is turned either at high or low speed. It turns at high speed for 3 seconds during
a copy cycle and after the Power Switch is turned ON.
Cooling Fan

PC Drum Charge Corona

Duct

Image Transfer/Paper
Separator Coronas

1151M009AA

Control Signal Energized Deenergized WIRING DIAGRAM

M9 PWB-A PJ6A-9 H L 2-O

M-73
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

1151SBM2800A

28 OPTICAL SECTION COOLING FAN

Optical Section Cooling Fan Motor M3 draws outside air into the copier and blows
it against the Original Glass which is heated by lit Exposure Lamp LA1.

The Filter at the intake port of the Fan prevents dust and dirt from entering the
Optical Section of the copier.

M3 turns only during a copy cycle.

Front of Copier

Original Glass
Filter

Optical Section Cooling

Outside Air Fan Motor M3

Control Signal Energized Deenergized WIRING DIAGRAM

M3 PWB-A PJ32A-2 L H 20-O

M-74
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

1151SBM2900A

29 MEMORY BACKUP
IC1 (RAM) of RAM Board PWB-R connected to Main Control Board PWB-A stores
the setting/adjustment values set in the Tech. Rep. Modes as well as the counter
counts. Backup Battery BAT1 is mounted on PWB-R to prevent the contents of
memory from being lost when the power cord is unplugged or PWB-R removed from
the copier. BAT1 requires a voltage of 2V or more to retain the contents of memory.

Important
As we noted above, the RAM stores critical data. If PWB-R has been replaced with
a new one, memory must first be cleared and then all settings be made again. It
should also be noted that PWB-R should not be replaced at the same time when
PWB-A is replaced.

M-75
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 GENERAL, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
96.11.01

1151SBM000EA

Copyright
1996 MINOLTA CO., LTD
Printed in Japan

Use of this manual should

be strictly supervised to
avoid disclosure of
confidential information.

MINOLTA CO., LTD. 1151-7991-11 96115700

Printed in Japan
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
96.11.01

1151SBD000AA

EP2010/EP1083

DIS/REASSEMBLY,
ADJUSTMENT
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
96.11.01

1151SBD0000A
u For the Utmost safety u

! Warning
D For replacement parts, use the genuine parts with their part numbers specified in the parts manual. Use
of a wrong part could cause an overload or dielectric breakdown, resulting in an electric shock or fire.
D Replace a blown fuse or thermal fuse with the corresponding genuine part with its part number specified
in the parts manual. Use of a fuse with a different rating or one with the same rating but of a different
type can result in a fire.
Especially when a thermal fuse blows frequently, the thermal control system is probably faulty.
Be sure to take necessary action.
D Before attempting to disassemble the machine, be sure to unplug its power cord. The machine contains
a high voltage unit and a circuit with a large current capacity that may cause an electric shock or burn
from sparking.
The machine also contains quick moving parts, which could injure a person.
If the machine uses a laser, a person can lose his/her eyesight by a laser beam leak.
D Wherever feasible, keep the covers and parts mounted when energizing the machine.
If it is absolutely necessary to energize the machine with its cover removed, do not touch an exposed
part that is being charged and use care not to allow your clothing to be caught by a timing belt, gear,
or other moving part.
D Do not leave the machine unattended while it is being energized.

! Caution
D To actuate an interlock switch with a cover removed or opened, be sure to use the interlock switch actu-
ating jig. Use of folded paper can damage the interlock switch mechanism.

i
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
96.11.01

! Caution
D A high voltage is being applied to the part marked with the symbol shown
on the right. Touching it can cause an electric shock. Be sure to unplug the
power cord when servicing this part or other parts near it.
D When the machine is energized with any of its covers removed, never use a flammable spray near it,
as a fire can result.
D Make sure that correct screws (diameter and length of the screw, binding/tapping screws) are used in
the correct places when assembling parts. If a wrong screw is used, a short insulating distance could
result. It could also result in collapsed threads, which provides only a poor grounding connection, result-
ing in an electric shock.
D A toothed washer and spring washer, if used originally, must be reinstalled. If they are left out, a contact
failure results, causing an electric shock or fire.
D Replace a lithium cell only with one having the part number specified in the parts manual. An explosion
could result if the cell is installed with wrong polarity or a wrong cell is installed.
Dispose of a used lithium cell according to the applicable local regulations. Never throw it away or aban-
don it on the user’s premises.

u Other Precautions u
D While the machine is being energized, do not unplug or plug in a connector on a PWB or relay harness.
D Since the Magnet Roller of the Imaging Unit generates a strong magnetic force, do not bring a CRT, watch,
floppy disk, or magnetic card near it.
D Use of an air gun or vacuum generates static electricity which can cause the ATDC Sensor and associated
parts to break down. Be sure therefore to use a blower brush or cloth to clean these parts. If a unit is to
be cleaned, be sure to remove the sensors in advance.
D MOS lCs are susceptible to static electricity. When handling a PWB loaded with MOS ICs, follow precau-
tions given in “INSTRUCTIONS FOR HANDLING THE PWBs WITH MOS ICs.”
D The PC Drum is highly delicate. When handling the PC Drum, follow the precautions given in “HANDLING
OF THE PC DRUM.”
D To reassemble, reverse the order of disassembly unless otherwise specified.
D Note that replacement of a PWB may call for readjustments or resetting of particular items.

CAUTION: DANGER OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS INCORRECTLY REPLACED. REPLACE

ONLY WITH THE SAME OR EQUIVALENT TYPE RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUFACTURER.
DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS.

ADVARSEL!:Lithiumbatteri - Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering. Udskiftning må kun ske med

batteri af samme fabrikat og type. Levér det brugle bafferi tilbage til leverandoren.

ii
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
96.11.01

1151SBD000BA

CONTENTS
1 SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS

1-1. PRECAUTIONS FOR DISASSEMBLY/ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . D-1

1-2. INSTRUCTIONS FOR HANDLING THE PWBs
WITH MOS ICs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2
1-3. HANDLING OF THE PC DRUM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2
1-4. PARTS WHICH MUST NOT BE TOUCHED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4

2 DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY

2-1. DOORS, COVERS, AND EXTERIOR PARTS:

IDENTIFICATION AND REMOVAL PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . D-5
2-2. REMOVAL OF PWBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8
2-3. BELT INSTALLATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-10
2-4. PAPER TAKE–UP/TRANSPORT SECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-11
(1) Removal of the Paper Take-Up Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-11
(2) Removal of the Paper Take-Up Rolls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-12
(3) Cleaning of the Paper Take-Up Rolls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-12
(4) Removal of the Suction Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-12
(5) Disassembly of the Suction Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-12
(6) Replacement of the Paper Lifting Springs
(2nd Drawer) : EP2010 only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-13
(7) Disassembly of the Multi Bypass Table (Option) . . . . . . . . . . D-14
2-5. OPTICAL SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-19
(1) Removal of the Lens Drive Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-19
(2) Winding of the Lens Drive Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-20
(3) Removal of the Scanner Drive Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-21
(4) Winding of the Scanner Drive Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-23
(5) Removal of the Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-25
(6) Cleaning of the Exposure Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-25
(7) Cleaning of the 1st/2nd/3rd Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-26
(8) Cleaning of the Lens and 4th Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-26
(9) Cleaning of the Optical Section Cooling Fan Filter . . . . . . . . D-26
2-6. IMAGING UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-27
(1) Disassembly, Cleaning, Replacement and Starter
changing of the Imaging Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-27
D Replacement of the PC Drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-27
D Replacement of the Toner Scattering Prevention
Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-27
D Replacement of the Cleaning Blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-28
D Cleaning of the PC Drum Paper Separator Fingers . . . . . . D-29
D Cleaning of the Ds Positioning Collars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-29
D Cleaning of the Paper Dust Remover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-29

iii
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
96.11.01

CONTENTS
D Replacement of the Toner Antispill Mylar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-29
D Cleaning of the Upper Pre-Image Transfer
Guide Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-30
D Cleaning of the Magnet Roller Lower Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-30
(2) Cleaning of the Main Erase Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-31
(3) Cleaning of the Unexposed Areas/Edge Erase Lamp . . . . . . D-31
2-7. PC DRUM CHARGE CORONA/IMAGE TRANSFER
CORONA UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-33
(1) Cleaning of the PC Drum Charge Corona Housing . . . . . . . . D-33
(2) Cleaning of the PC Drum Charge Corona Grid Mesh . . . . . . D-33
(3) Cleaning of the Comb Electrode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-34
(4) Cleaning of the Image Transfer/Paper Separator
Coronas Wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-34
(5) Cleaning of the Image Transfer/Paper Separator
Coronas Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-34
(6) Cleaning of the Lower Pre-Image Transfer Guide
Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-35
(7) Replacement of the Ozone Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-35
2-8. Fusing Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-35
(1) Removal of the Fusing Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-35
(2) Cleaning of the Pre-Fusing Guide Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-36
(3) Removal of the Upper Fusing Roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-36
(4) Cleaning of the Upper Fusing Roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-38
(5) Cleaning of the Upper Paper Separator Fingers . . . . . . . . . . D-38
(6) Cleaning of the Fusing Thermistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-38
(7) Removal of the Lower Fusing Roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-39
(8) Cleaning of the Lower Fusing Roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-39
(9) Cleaning of the Lower Paper Separator Fingers . . . . . . . . . . D-39
(10) Removal of the Oil Roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-40
(11) Cleaning of the Oil Roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-40
(12) Disassembly of the Exit/Duplex Switching Unit
(Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-40

3 ADJUSTMENT

3-1. JIGS AND TOOLS USED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-44

3-2. ADJUSTMENT REQUIREMENTS LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-45
3-3. ADJUSTMENT OF SWITCHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-46
(1) Adjustment of Front Door Interlock Switch S21 . . . . . . . . . . . D-47
3-4. ELECTRICAL/IMAGE ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-48
(1) Adjustment of the Maximum Exposure Lamp Voltage
for the Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-48
(2) Adjustment of the Optimum Exposure Setting in the
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-51
(3) Adjustment of the Optimum Exposure Setting in the
Auto Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-52

iv
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
96.11.01

CONTENTS
(4) Adjustment of the ATDC Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-53
(5) Adjustment of the Aperture Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-54
(6) Adjustment of the Manual Bypass Table Reference
Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-55
(7) Adjustment of the 1st/2nd (EP2010 only) Drawer Reference
Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-56
(8) Adjustment of the Paper Lifting Plate Springs
(2nd Drawer) (EP2010 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-57
(9) Adjustment of the Leading Edge Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-58
D Full Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-59
D Enlargement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-60
D Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-61
(10) Adjustment of the Image Leading Edge Erase
Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-62
(11) Adjustment of the Edge Erase
Lamp Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-64
3-5. OTHER ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-65
(1) Adjustment of the Scanner/Mirrors Carriage Position . . . . . . D-65
(2) Adjustment of the Gap Between the Doctor Blade and
Sleeve Roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-66
(3) Adjustment of the PC Drum Paper Separator Fingers
Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-67
(4) Adjustment of the Original Size Detecting Board . . . . . . . . . . D-68
4 MISCELLANEOUS

4-1. INSTALLATION OF THE PLUG-IN COUNTER MOUNTING

BRACKET (OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-69

v
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
96.11.01

1139SBD0100A

1 SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS
1151SBD0101B
1-1. PRECAUTIONS FOR DISASSEMBLY/ADJUSTMENTS
Observe the following precautions whenever servicing the copier.
D Be sure to unplug the copier from the outlet before attempting to service the copier.
D The basic rule is not to operate the copier anytime during disassembly.
If it is absolutely necessary to run the copier with its covers removed, use care not to allow your clothing
to be caught in revolving parts such as the timing belt and gears.
D Be sure to use the Interlock Switch Actuating Jig whenever it is necessary to actuate the Interlock Switch
with the covers left open or removed.
D Do not plug in or unplug print jacks on the Board or connect or disconnect the Board connectors while
power is being supplied to the copier.
D Do not use flammable spray around the copier in operation.
D The Magnet Roller of the Imaging Unit generates strong magnetic force. Do not bring it near a cathode-ray
tube or watch.
D The lithium cell in RAM Board PWB-R can burst. At replacement, make sure of the correct polarity and
do not change it or create a closed circuit.
A used lithium cell should be disposed of according to the local regulations and never be discarded casual-
ly or left unattended at the user’s premises.
D Do not use an air gun or vacuum cleaner for cleaning the ATDC Sensor and other sensors, as they can
cause electrostatic destruction. Use a blower brush and cloth. If a unit containing these sensors is to be
cleaned, first remove the sensors from the unit.
D When handling the PWBs with MOS ICs, observe “Instructions for Handling the PWBs with MOS ICs.”
D When handling the PC Drum, observe precautions given in “Handling of the PC Drum.”
D Note that replacement of a PWB may call for readjustments or resetting of particular items.
D Use the right screw in the right place at reassembly. Note that some are longer and some are thicker than
others.
D A toothed washer is used with the screw that secures the ground wire to ensure positive conduction. Do
not forget to insert this washer at reassembly.
D To reassemble the copier, reverse the order of disassembly unless otherwise specified.
D If it becomes necessary to replace the thermal fuse or any other fuse mounted on a board, be sure to use
one of the rating marked on the blown fuse.
Always note the rating marked on the fuse, as the rating and mounting site or number used are subject
to change without notice.
D Do not pull out the Toner Hopper while the Toner Bottle is turning, as a damaged Toner Replenishing Motor
or locking mechanism could result.
If the copier is to be run with the Front Door swung down, make sure that the Toner Hopper is in the locked
position.

CAUTION: DANGER OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS INCORRECTLY REPLACED. REPLACE

ONLY WITH THE SAME OR EQUIVALENT TYPE RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUFACTURER.
DISCARD USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS.

D-1
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
96.11.01

1139SBD0102A
1-2. INSTRUCTIONS FOR HANDLING THE PWBs WITH MOS ICs
The following precautions must be observed when handling P.W. Boards with MOS (Metal Oxide
Semiconductor) ICs.

During Transportation/Storage:
D During transportation or when in storage, new P.W. Boards must not be indiscriminately removed from
their protective conductive bags.
D Do not store or place P.W. Boards in a location exposed to direct sunlight.
D When it becomes absolutely necessary to remove a Board from its conductive bag or case, always place
it on its conductive mat in an area as free as possible from static electricity.
D Do not touch the pins of the ICs with your bare hands.

During Replacement:
D Before unplugging connectors from the P.W. Boards, make sure that the power cord has been unplugged
from the outlet.
D When removing a Board from its conductive bag or conductive case, do not touch the pins of the ICs or
the printed pattern. Place it in position by holding only the edges of the Board.
D Before plugging connectors into the Board, make sure that the power cord has been unplugged from the
power outlet.

During Inspection:
D Avoid checking the IC directly with a multimeter; use connectors on the Board.
D Never create a closed circuit across IC pins with a metal tool.
D When it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components on the Board, be sure
to ground your body.

1151SBD0103A
1-3. HANDLING OF THE PC DRUM
During Transportation/Storage:
D Use the specified carton whenever moving or storing the PC Drum.
D The storage temperature is in the range between –20°C and +40°C.
D In summer, avoid leaving the PC Drum in a car for a long time.

Handling:
D Ensure that the correct PC Drum is used.
D Whenever the PC Drum has been removed from the copier, store it in its container or protect it with a Drum
Cloth.
D The PC Drum exhibits greatest light fatigue after being exposed to strong light over an extended period
of time. Never, therefore, expose it to direct sunlight.
D Use care not to contaminate the surface of the PC Drum with oil-base solvent, fingerprints, and other for-
eign matter.
D Do not scratch the surface of the PC Drum.
D Do not apply chemicals to the surface of the PC Drum.
D Do not attempt to wipe clean the surface of the PC Drum.

D-2
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
96.11.01

If, however, the surface is contaminated with fingerprints, clean it using the following procedure.
1. Place the PC Drum into one half of its container.

2. Gently wipe the residual toner off the surface of the PC

Drum with a dry, Dust-Free Cotton Pad.
a) Rotate the PC Drum so that the area of its surface on
which the line of toner left by the Cleaning Blade is pres-
ent is facing straight up. Wipe the surface in one contin-
uous movement from the rear edge of the PC Drum to
the front edge and off the surface of the PC Drum.
b) Rotate the PC Drum slightly and wipe the newly ex-
posed surface area with a CLEAN face of the Dust-Free
Cotton Pad. Repeat this procedure until the entire sur-
face of the PC Drum has been thoroughly cleaned.
* At this time, always use a CLEAN face of the dry Dust-Free
Cotton Pad until no toner is evident on the face of the Pad
after wiping.
3. Soak a small amount of either ethyl alcohol or isopropyl al-
cohol into a clean, unused Dust-Free Cotton Pad which
has been folded over into quarters. Now, wipe the surface
of the PC Drum in one continuous movement from its rear
edge to its front edge and off its surface one to two times.
* Never move the Pad back and forth.

4. Using the SAME face of the Pad, repeat the procedure ex-
plained in the latter half of step 3 until the entire surface of
the PC Drum has been wiped. Always OVERLAP the
areas when wiping. Two complete turns of the PC Drum
would be appropriate for cleaning.

NOTES
D The Organic Photoconductor Drum is softer than CdS and Selenium Drums and is therefore suscepti-
ble to scratches.
D Even when the PC Drum is only locally dirtied, wipe the entire surface.
D Do not expose the PC Drum to direct sunlight. Clean it as quickly as possible even under interior illu-
mination.
D If dirt remains after cleaning, repeat the entire procedure from the beginning one more time.

D-3
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
96.11.01

1151SBD0104A
1-4. PARTS WHICH MUST NOT BE TOUCHED
(1) Screws
Purpose of Application of Red Paint
Red paint is applied to the screws which cannot be readjusted, set, or reinstalled in the field.
The basic rule is not to remove or loosen the screws to which red paint is applied. In addition, be advised
that, if two or more screws are designated as those which must not be touched on a single part, only
one representative screw may be marked with red paint.

(2) Variable Resistors on Board

Do not turn the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions are given in “ADJUST-
MENT.”

(3) Other Screws

Lower Pre-Image Transfer Lens Rail height
Guide Plate (2 screws) setting screws (2)

1151D042AA

D-4
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
96.11.01

2 DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY
2-1. DOORS, COVERS, AND EXTERIOR PARTS: IDENTIFICATION AND RE-
MOVAL PROCEDURES

<EP2010> <EP1083>

8
6
7 9
5
4 8 10
3 9
2 10 11

1
12
11 (*1)
13
12

13 14
14 1151D027AA
16 (*1)
1151D001AA
15
(*1 : EP2010 only)

20

21
19
22
23
18

17

24

26 25 1151D028AA

D-5
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
96.11.01

No. Part Name Removal Procedure

1 Front Door Swing down No.1. Remove one screw that secures the
Belt. Remove two screws that secure the Front Door (only
on one side). Slide the Door to the side from which the
screws have been removed.
2 Control Panel Swing down No.1. Remove No.9. Release and swing up
the Upper Half of the copier. Remove No.21. Remove
two screws that secure the control panel and loosen another
five screws that secure the control panel.
3 Original Scales
Remove two screws that secure the Scales.
4 Original Glass
5 Rear Upper Cover Remove the Original Cover. Release and swing up the
(Small) Upper Half of the copier. Remove the Screw Cover and one
mounting screw of No.5.
6 Left Hinge Cover Remove the Original Cover. Remove one screw that
secures the Left Hinge Cover.
7 Rear Upper Cover
Remove the Original Cover. Remove No.6, 8 and 9.
8 Right Hinge Cover
Remove one screw that secures No.7.
9 Upper Right Cover
10 Right Cover Remove No.11. Remove No.9. Remove two screws that
secure No.10.
11 Middle Right Cover Remove screws that secure No.11. (EP2010: three/EP1083:
four).
12 Right Door Open No.12 and remove it by lifting it up.
13 Multi Bypass Table Remove two screws that secure the Multi Bypass Table
Mounting Bracket *1 Mounting Bracket.
14 Counter Cover Remove No.14 by snapping if off.
15 1st Drawer Slide out the Drawer and remove one screw that secures the
16 2nd Drawer *2 Stopper at the rear left corner.

17 Lower Rear Cover *2 Remove two screws that secure the Lower Rear Cover.
18 Rear Cover Swing down No.1. Release and swing up the Upper Half of
the copier. Remove two screws that secure the Rear Cover.
19 Upper Rear Cover Swing down No.1. Release and swing up the Upper Half of
the copier. Remove three screws that secure the Upper
Rear Cover.
20 Original Cover

Remove the Original Cover by pulling it up.

D-6
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
96.11.01

No. Part Name Removal Procedure

21 Upper Left Cover Swing down No.1. Release and swing up the Upper Half of
the copier. Remove four screws that secure the Upper Left
Cover.
22 Middle Front Left Cover Swing down No.1. Release and swing up the Upper Half of
the copier. Remove one screw that secures the Middle
Front Left Cover.
23 Front Exit Cover Swing down No.1. Release and swing up the Upper Half of
the copier. Remove No.22. Remove one screw that se-
cures the Front Exit Cover.
24 Rear Exit Cover Swing down No.1. Release and swing up the Upper Half of
the copier. Remove No.26. Remove one screw that se-
cures the Rear Exit Cover.
25 Lower Left Cover Remove four screws that secure the Lower Left Cover.
Middle Rear Left Cover Swing down No.1. Release and swing up the Upper Half of
26 the copier. Remove one screw that secures the Middle
Rear Left Cover.

*1: Multi Bypass Section: EP1083 option

*2: EP2010 only

D-7
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
96.11.01

2-2. REMOVAL OF PWBs

D When removing a PWB, first go over “PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING THE PWBs” contained in
SWITCHES ON PWBs and use the removal procedures given on the next page.
D Replacement of a PWB may call for readjustments or resetting of particular items.
D The removal procedures given on the next page omit the steps to unplug connectors and remove the PWB
from the PWB support.

PWB-D

PWB-C

PU2

* Except North, Central and South America, Europe, Philippines, Pakistan.

D-8
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
96.11.01

Symbol Name Removal Procedure

PWB-A Master Board Open 1. Release and swing up the Upper Half of the
copier. Remove 19.
PWB-C Power Supply Board Open 1. Release and swing up the Upper Half of the
copier. Remove 17 (EP1083 only), 18, and 19.
PWB-D Noise Filter Board Remove four screws that secure the Power Supply Unit
Cover.
<EP2010>
Open 1. Remove 11. Remove 9 and 10. Remove the
PWB-E Motor Drive Board Multi Bypass Unit.
<EP1083>
Open 1 and 12. Remove 9, 10, and 11.
PWB-H AE Sensor Board Remove 3 and 4. Remove the optical cover.
PWB-P Control Panel Open 1. Remove 9. Release and swing up the Upper
Half of the copier. Remove 21. Remove seven screws
that secure Control Panel.
PWB-R RAM Board Open 1. Release and swing up the Upper Half of the copi-
er. Remove 19.
<EP2010>
Open 1. Remove 11. Remove 9 and 10. Remove the
PU1 Power Supply Unit Multi Bypass Unit.
<EP1083>
Open 1 and 12. Remove 9, 10, and 11.
PU2 DC Power Supply Unit Open 1. Release and swing up the Upper Half of the copi-
er. Remove 17 (EP1083 only) and 18.
HV1 High Voltage Unit Open 1. Release and swing up the Upper Half of the copi-
er. Remove 19. Remove PWB-A.
UN2 Original Size Detecting Remove 3 and 4. Remove the optical cover.
(EP2010 Board
only)
UN3 ATDC Sensor Open 1. Release and swing up the Upper Half of the copi-
er. Take out the I/U. Remove two screws that secure the
Synchronizing Roller Guide Unit.

z Details of Readjustments/Resetting Involved In Replacement of PWB-R, UN2 and UN3.

D When PWB-R is replaced:
Carry out Memory Clear and then make the Tech. Rep. Program, User’s Choice, and Adjust settings
again.
D When UN2 is replaced: (EP2010 only)
Adjust the Original Size Detecting Board.
D When UN3 is replaced:
Discard the developer which had been used until UN3 was replaced, charge the Developing Unit with
fresh starter, and adjust ATDC.

D-9
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
96.11.01

2-3. BELT INSTALLATIONS

D Rear View

Drive/Suction Unit

Paper Take-Up Unit 1151D052AB

<EP2010>

<EP1083>

1142D005AA

D-10
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
96.11.01

2-4. PAPER TAKE-UP/TRANSPORT SECTIONS

(1) Removal of the Paper Take-Up Unit
1. Remove the Multi Bypass Table. (EP1083 : OPTION)
See p. D-14. (NO 1 ~ 7)
2. Slide out the 1st and 2nd (EP2010 only) Drawers.

3. Press the tabs at the two places indicated by the arrow

and, at the same time, remove the cover.
(EP1083 only)

1142D007AA

4. Remove screws and the Paper Take-Up Unit. (EP2010 :

four screws/EP1083 : five screws)

1151D020AA

5. Unplug the connectors from the solenoids on the Paper

Take-Up Unit. (EP2010 : two connectors/ EP1083 : one
connector)

6. Remove the Rear and Rear Upper covers.

7. Remove the DC Power Supply Unit.
8. Remove the harness from the wiring saddle.
9. Unplug the connectors (EP2010 : two connectors/
EP1083 : one connector).

D-11
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
96.11.01

(2) Removal of the Paper Take-Up Rolls

1. Remove one screw to remove the Paper Take-Up Roll.

(3) Cleaning of the Paper Take-Up Rolls

1. Remove the Paper Take-Up Unit from the copier.
2. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe clean the
Paper Take-Up Rolls.

(4) Removal of the Suction Unit

1. Remove the Fusing Unit. (See p. D-35.)
2. Unplug the Suction Fan connector and remove the wire
from the clamp.

1151D029AA

3. Remove four screws to remove the Suction Unit.

1151D030AA

(5) Disassembly of the Suction Unit

1. Remove the four Suction Drive Rolls and six bushings by
pulling them in the direction of the arrow.

1151D004AA

D-12
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
96.11.01

2. Snap off the three E-rings from the Suction Drive Unit.
3. Remove the gear and bushings.

4. Remove the Pre-Fusing Guide Plate.

5. Remove the Suction Drive Unit.

1151D005AA

6. Remove the four belts.

1151D006AA

7. Remove the Suction Fan.

1151D009AA

(6) Replacement of the Paper Lifting Springs (2nd Drawer) : EP2010 only
z Remark
D The replacement springs are installed on the underside of the 2nd Drawer.

D-13
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
96.11.01

1. Remove the Stoppers of the 2nd Drawer and the 2nd

Drawer.

1136P243AA

2. Remove one screw and the Edge Guide Unit.

1151D043AA

3. Remove the Front Separator Finger by removing its pin.

4. Raise the Paper Lifting Plate Unit and replace the Paper
Lifting Springs. See p. D-57.

(7) Disassembly of the Multi Bypass Table (EP1083 : OPTION)

1. Remove the Right Door.

D-14
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
96.11.01

2. Remove three screws and the Large Cover.

3. Remove one screw and the Small Cover.

4. Remove three screws and the Guide Lever Unit.

5. Remove four screws and the Multi Bypass Table.

6. Unplug the Multi Bypass Table connector.

D-15
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
96.11.01

7. Remove one screw and the Multi Bypass Table.

8. Unplug one connector.

9. Remove the Tension Unit.

1151D018AA

10. Remove two screws and the Clutch Mounting Bracket.

11. Remove two screws and the Lower Guide.

12. Remove four screws and the Separator Guide Plate Unit.

D-16
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
96.11.01

NOTE
When reinstalling the Separator Guide Plate Unit, press
the parts shown on the left up against the copier frame
(both at front and rear).

13. Remove two screws and the Lever.

14. Snap off one C-clip and remove the Separator Unit.

NOTE
D Please use tweezers when reinstalling the C-clip.

15. Snap off one C-clip and remove the Separator Roll Assy.

16. Remove three screws and the Solenoid Mounting Bracket.

D-17
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
96.11.01

17. Unplug one solenoid connector.

18. Unplug one photosensor connector and remove the har-
ness from the clamp.

NOTE
When reinstalling the Solenoid Mounting Bracket, make
sure that the Solenoid is in the deenergized position.

19. Snap off the two C-clips to remove the Paper Take-Up Roll
Unit.

20. Snap off the three C-clips to remove the Paper Feed Roll.

21. Snap off one C-clip and remove the Paper Take-Up Roll.

D-18
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
96.11.01

2-5. OPTICAL SECTION

(1) Removal of the Lens Drive Cable
1. Remove two screws and the Optical Section Cover.

2. Remove three screws and the Lens Cover.

3. Remove two screws, two clamps and the Lens Motor Unit.

4. Remove one screw and the Cable Fixing Bracket.

5. Remove the spring.

6. Remove the Cable Drive Gear and the Lens Drive Cable.

D-19
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
96.11.01

(2) Winding of the Lens Drive Cable

1. Hold the Cable Drive Gear in position with its Bead at the
bottom.

2. Wind the shorter length of the Cable three turns clockwise

around the Cable Drive Gear, working from the back to the
front side. Then tape it.

3. Wind the longer length of the Cable five turns counter-

clockwise around the Cable Drive Gear, working from the
front to back side. Then tape it.

4. Slide the Cable Drive Gear onto its shaft and insert a
wrench into the hole to position the Cable Drive Gear.

5. Pass the longer length of the Cable through the U-shaped

hole in the Light Blocking Plate and wind it around the
Pulley farther away from the Cable Drive Gear.

D-20
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
96.11.01

6. Temporarily secure the longer length of the Cable to the

Cable Fixing Bracket, ensuring a distance of 5 ± 2 mm for
the dimension shown on the left.

7. Wind the shorter length of the Cable around the Pulley

which is nearer to the Cable Drive Gear.

8. Hook the spring onto the shorter length of the Cable and
pull it to hook onto the longer length of the Cable.
9. Check that the dimension noted in step 6 above measures
5 ± 2 mm. Then, secure the Cable Fixing Bracket.
10. Remove the wrench and peel off the two pieces of tape.

(3) Removal of the Scanner Drive Cable

D Remove the Original Cover, Original Scales, and Original Glass.
D Remove the Middle Right, Upper Right, Right, Upper Left, and Upper Rear Covers.
D Remove the Left and Right Hinge Covers, Rear Upper Cover (Small), and Rear Upper Cover.
1. Align the Scanner with the rectangular hole in the upper
copier frame and remove the screw from the Scanner Fix-
ing Bracket.
2. Remove the Fixing Bracket.

3. Unhook the spring to remove the shorter length of the

Cable.

D-21
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
96.11.01

4. Move the 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage toward the Scanner

Drive Gear so that the Cable slacks off and then remove
the longer length of the Cable.
5. Remove four screws and PWB-A.

6. Remove three screws and the Scanner Motor Mounting

Bracket.
7. Snap off one E-ring and remove the Scanner Drive Gear.

1151D032AA

8. Remove two screws and the Pulley.

9. Remove the Cable.

D-22
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
96.11.01

(4) Winding of the Scanner Drive Cable

z Remark
Whenever the Scanner Drive Cable has been rewound, be sure to make the ”Adjustment of the Scanner/
Mirrors Carriage Position.” See p. D-65.

Pulley B

Pulley A

Scanner Drive Gear

Pulley C

1. Fit the Pulley to the Scanner Drive Gear using two screws.

2. Wind the shorter length of the Cable 2 turns clockwise

around the Pulley, working from the back to front side.

3. Wind the longer length of the Cable 5-3/4 turns counter-

clockwise around the Pulley, working from the front to back
side. Then, slip the Cable Holding Jig onto the Pulley.

D-23
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
96.11.01

4. Fit the Scanner Drive Gear onto the Scanner Motor Mount-
ing Bracket using one E-ring.
5. Secure the Scanner Motor Mounting Bracket to the frame
using three screws.

1151D032AA

6. Insert a wrench into the holes in the Scanner Drive Gear

and the frame to position the Gear.

1151D033AA

7. Wind the longer length of the Cable around Pulleys C and

B and then secure it to the frame.

NOTE

Wind the longer length of the Cable around the lower

groove in Pulley B (of the two grooves). Position the termi-
nal of the Cable as illustrated on the left.

8. Wind the shorter length of the Cable around Pulleys A and

B.
NOTE
Wind the shorter length of the Cable around the upper
groove in Pulley B (two grooves).

D-24
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
96.11.01

9. Fit the Cable into the groove in the Wire Guide and hook
the spring.
10. Remove the wrench and Cable Holding Jig.

(5) Removal of the Scanner

1. Turn the Scanner Drive Gear to move the Scanner to the
right-hand side of the copier. Then, remove three screws
and the Scanner.

1151D019AA

(6) Cleaning of the Exposure Lamp

1. Remove two screws and the Exposure Lamp Terminal.
2. Slide out the Exposure Lamp.

1151D021AA

3. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, clean the Lamp

by wiping its surface gently in one direction.

NOTE
When reinstalling the Lamp, use care not to allow the pro-
truding navel of the Lamp to hit against the Lamp Reflector
and that the protruding navel points toward the opening in
the Lamp Reflector.
1076D131

D-25
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
96.11.01

(7) Cleaning of the 1st/2nd/3rd Mirrors

1. Turn the Scanner Drive Gear to move the Scanner away
from the Mirrors. Then, wipe clean the 1st/2nd/3rd Mirrors
with a soft cloth.
NOTE
An alcohol-dampened cloth may be used if the Mirror is se-
riously contaminated.

(8) Cleaning of the Lens and 4th Mirror

1. Gently dust off the surface of the Lens and 4th Mirror by
using a dry soft cloth.

NOTE
An alcohol-dampened cloth may be used if the Lens or Mir-
ror is seriously contaminated.

(9) Cleaning of the Optical Section Cooling Fan Filter

1. Unhook the Fan Cover at the bottom by slightly raising
and, at the same time pulling, the two catches on the bot-
tom.

2. Clean the Filter with a brush or a vacuum cleaner.

D-26
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
96.11.01

2-6. Imaging Unit

(1) Disassembly, Cleaning, Replacement and Starter Changing of the Imag-
ing Unit
1. Remove the Imaging Unit from the copier.
2. Remove two screws and the Imaging Unit Cover.

1151D044AA

3. Remove one screw and the PC Drum Charge Corona Unit.

Replacement of the PC Drum

4. Remove two screws and one Drum Pin to remove the PC

Drum.
NOTE
Whenever the PC Drum has been replaced, be sure to
make the “Adjustments of the Optimum Exposure Setting
in the Manual and Auto Mode.” See pp. D-51 to D-52.

Replacement of the Toner Scattering Prevention Plate

5. Remove one screw, one shoulder screw and the Toner

Scattering Prevention Plate.

6. Tilt the Developing Unit to remove the developer.

D-27
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
96.11.01

Replacement of the Cleaning Blade

7. Remove two screws and the Lid.

8. Remove the spring.

9. Remove two screws, one spring, one cap and the Cleaning
Blade. Replace it with a new one.

NOTE
When the Cleaning Blade has been replaced, apply toner
to the entire surface of the new Cleaning Blade.

Applying Toner to Cleaning Blade

Apply toner to the entire surface of the Cleaning Blade. (Do not forget to coat the surfaces on both ends.)

Install the PC Drum.

Apply a thin coat of toner to the PC Drum.

Turn the PC Drum 1/2 turns backward, then turn it one complete turn forward.

D-28
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
96.11.01

Cleaning of the PC Drum Paper Separator Fingers

10. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe clean the
Paper Separator Fingers.

Cleaning of the Ds Positioning Collars

11. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe clean the
Ds Positioning Collars.

Cleaning of the Paper Dust Remover

12. Remove two screws, two compression coil springs and the
Synchronizing Roller Unit.

NOTE
When removing the Synchronizing Roller Unit, use care
not to lose the compression coil springs. At reinstallation,
fit the close-coiled end of the springs to the bosses on the
Imaging Unit.

13. Remove the Synchronizing Roller.

14. Using a brush, whisk the dust and dirt off the Filter.

Replacement of the Toner Antispill Mylar

15. Remove two screws and the Bias Seal.

(No Bias Seals are mounted in the copiers for the U.S.A.,
Canada, and Europe.)
16. Remove two screws and the Toner Antispill Mylar and re-
place the Mylar.

D-29
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
96.11.01

NOTE
At reinstallation, press the Toner Antispill Mylar up against
the Imaging Unit Housing and the rear side of the copier
(in the directions of the arrows) and press the Bias Seal up
against the Imaging Unit Housing and the front side of the
copier (in the directions of the arrows).

Cleaning of the Upper Pre-Image Transfer Guide Plate

17. Remove two screws and the Upper Pre-Image Transfer

Guide Plate.

18. Using a brush, whisk toner and dust off the surface of the
Upper Pre-Image Transfer Guide Plate.

Cleaning of the Magnet Roller Lower Filter

19. Using a brush, whisk toner and dust off the Magnet Roller
Lower Filter.
(No Magnet Roller Lower Filters are mounted in the copi-
ers for the U.S.A., Canada, and Europe.)

20. Refit the parts to the Imaging Unit and reinstall the Imaging
Unit in the copier.
21. Charge fresh starter and make the ATDC adjustment. See
p. D-53.

D-30
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
96.11.01

(2) Cleaning of the Main Erase Lamp

1. Remove four screws and PWB-A.
2. Remove three screws and HV1.
3. Unplug the connector of the Main Erase Lamp.

4. Remove the Imaging Unit.

5. Pull out the Toner Bottle Holder to the front.
6. Remove one screw and the Main Erase Lamp.

7. Using a brush or a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, clean

the Erase Lamp.

NOTE
Do not touch the Lamp with bare hands.

(3) Cleaning of the Unexposed Areas/Edge Erase Lamp

1. Remove four screws and PWB-A.

1151D034AA

2. Insert PWB-A into the copier to secure it.

1151D035AA

D-31
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
96.11.01

3. Go to the rear of the copier and unplug the connector of Un-

exposed Areas/Edge Erase Lamp.

1151D036AA

4. Remove the Imaging Unit.

5. Remove one screw and the Unexposed Areas/Edge
Erase Lamp.
NOTE
When removing the Erase Lamp, use care not to lose the
pressure spring in the rear.

6. Using a brush or a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, clean

the Erase Lamp.

NOTE
After the Erase Lamp has been cleaned, make the “Adjust-
ment of the Edge Erase Lamp Position.” See p. D-64.

D-32
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
96.11.01

2-7. PC DRUM CHARGE CORONA/IMAGE TRANSFER CORONA UNIT

(1) Cleaning of the PC Drum Charge Corona Housing
1. Remove the Imaging Unit.
2. Remove one screw and PC Drum charge Corona Unit.
3. Press the Mesh Holder on the front of the Corona Unit in
the direction of arrow A to remove the Grid Mesh.

1151D037AA

4. Remove the Cleaning Pad Cover.

5. Remove the End Caps from the front and rear ends of the
Unit.

6. Remove the Comb Electrode.

NOTE
Use care not to deform the Electrode. When removing it,
first snap off its spring end.

7. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the Hous-

ing clean of dirt.

(2) Cleaning of the PC Drum Charge Corona Grid Mesh

1. Blow all foreign matter off the Grid with a blower brush.

NOTE
If the blower brush is not effective in cleaning the Grid, use
a soft cloth dampened with alcohol to clean serious con-
tamination.

D-33
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
96.11.01

(3) Cleaning of the Comb Electrode

1. Clean the Comb Electrode using the Corona Unit Cleaning
Lever.

(4) Cleaning of the Image Transfer/Paper Separator Coronas Wires

1. Clean the Image Transfer Corona Wire using the Corona
Wire Cleaning Lever.

2. Remove the four Paper Guides.

3. Dampen a soft cloth with alcohol, hold it with a pair of twee-
zers, and wipe the Paper Separator Corona Wire gently in
one direction.
(Go from the hook to spring end.)

(5) Cleaning of the Image Transfer/Paper Separator Coronas Housing

1. Remove the four Paper Guides.
2. Remove the two End Caps.
3. Remove the Image Transfer and Paper Separator Corona
Wires.

NOTE
When removing the Wire, unhook the spring end first
and use care to prevent break and deformation. (Use a
pair of tweezers)
Keep the Corona Wire Cleaning Lever (for the Image
Transfer Corona) pressed all the way back in. Do not
attempt to remove the Lower Pre-Image Transfer Guide
Plate as it has been adjusted for correct height.

4. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the Hous-

ing clean of dirt.

D-34
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
96.11.01

(6) Cleaning of the Lower Pre-Image Transfer Guide Plate

1. Using a brush, whisk dust off the Lower Pre-Image Trans-
fer Guide Plate.

(7) Replacement of the Ozone Filter

1. Press the Filter Cover Bracket in the direction of the arrows
and pull it off.
2. Remove the Filter and replace it with a new one.

1151D045AA

1139SBD0208A
2-8. Fusing Unit
(1) Removal of the Fusing Unit
1. Remove one screw and the Ground Wire of the Fusing
Unit.

1151D038AA

2. Unplug the Fusing Heater Lamp connector and remove

the wires from the clamp.

1151D007AA

3. Unplug the Fusing Thermistor connector and remove the

wires from the two clamps.

1151D008AA

D-35
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
96.11.01

4. Remove one screw and the Fusing Unit Locking Plate.

5. Turning it in the direction of the arrow, remove the Fusing
Unit.

NOTE

When reinstalling the Fusing Unit, install the Locking Plate

as illustrated on the left.

(2) Cleaning of the Pre-Fusing Guide Plate

1. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe clean the
Guide Plate.

(3) Removal of the Upper Fusing Roller

1. Remove two screws and the Fusing Unit Front Cover.
2. Remove two screws and the Fusing Unit Upper Cover.

3. Remove two screws and the Upper Paper Separator Fin-

gers Unit.

D-36
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
96.11.01

4. Remove four Cord Holders of the Fusing Thermistor.

5. Remove one screw and the Fusing Thermistor.

1151D011AA

6. Remove the screw and clamp that secure the Lamp har-
ness at the front of the copier.

1151D012AA

7. Remove the rear lamp harness and harness clamp (six).

8. Remove the mounting bracket (one screw).

1151D013AA

9. Remove the Fusing Thermoswitch (two screws).

1151D014AA

D-37
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
96.11.01

10. Slide out the Fusing Heater Lamp.

11. Remove two C-clips.

12. Remove one spur gear.
13. Remove two bushings.
14. Remove the Upper Fusing Roller.

(4) Cleaning of the Upper Fusing Roller

1. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol or silicone oil,
wipe clean the Upper Fusing Roller.

(5) Cleaning of the Upper Paper Separator Fingers

1. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol or silicone oil,
wipe clean the Upper Separator Fingers.

(6) Cleaning of the Fusing Thermistor

1. Remove one screw to remove the Fusing Thermistor.
2. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol or silicone oil,
wipe clean the Thermistor.

1151D039AA

D-38
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
96.11.01

(7) Removal of the Lower Fusing Roller

1. Turning it in the direction of the arrow, remove the Lower
Separator Fingers Unit.

2. Remove the Lower Fusing Roller

(8) Cleaning of the Lower Fusing Roller

1. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol or silicone oil,
wipe clean the Lower Fusing Roller.

(9) Cleaning of the Lower Paper Separator Fingers

1. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol or silicone oil,
wipe clean the Lower Separator Fingers.

D-39
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
96.11.01

(10) Removal of the Oil Roller

1. Remove the front holder (one screw).
2. Remove the front bushing.

1151D015AA

(11) Cleaning of the Oil Roller

1. Using a brush, clean the Oil Roller.

(12) Disassembly of the Exit/Duplex Switching Unit (Option)

1. Remove two screws and the Upper Guide Plate.

2. Remove two screws and the Exit/Duplex Switching Unit.

3. Unplug one connector.

4. Remove two screws and the Cover.

D-40
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
96.11.01

5. Remove the Solenoid Cover by unhooking its catches at

three places.

6. Unplug the solenoid connector.

7. Remove the harness from the Solenoid Unit clamps at two
places.

8. Remove one screw and the Solenoid Unit.

NOTE
If the solenoid has been removed from the Solenoid Unit,
make the adjustment shown on the left with the Solenoid
Make the adjustment with
the Lever in contact with
Unit installed in the Exit/Duplex Switching Unit.
the metal plate.
4 mm

9. Remove three screws and the Copy Tray Holder.

D-41
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
96.11.01

10. Remove four screws and the Lower Guide.

11. Snap off two E-rings to remove the Exit/Duplex Switching

Plate.

12. Remove one screw and the Photoswitch Mounting Brack-

et.
13. Remove two screws and the Exit Rolls Mounting Bracket
Unit.

NOTE
When reinstalling the Exit Rolls Mounting Bracket Unit,
make sure that the Reinforcement Plate Unit is in contact
with the Exit Rolls Mounting Bracket Unit as shown on the
left.

14. Snap off two E-rings to remove the Exit Roller.

D-42
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
96.11.01

15. Remove the harness from the clamp.

16. Remove two screws and the Reinforcement Plate Unit.

NOTE
When reinstalling the Reinforcement Plate Unit, make
sure that the Unit is in contact with the frame at the front
and rear sides of the copier as shown on the left.

D-43
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
96.11.01

3 ADJUSTMENT
3-1. JIGS AND TOOLS USED
z Important
D When adjusting the positions of the Scanner and Mirrors Carriage, use Jigs numbered  and Ã.
D When adjusting the gap between the Doctor Blade and Sleeve Roller, use Jigs numbered Ä and Å.
D When adjusting the position of PC Drum Paper Separator Fingers, use Jigs numbered Ä and Æ.

À Cable Holding jig Á Front Door Interlock

Switch Actuating Jig

 Scanner Positioning jig à Scanner/Mirrors

Carriage Positioning jig

1151D022AA

Ä Sleeve/Magnet Roller Å D.B. Adjusting jigs

Position jig

Æ PC Drum Paper
Separator Fingers
Positioning jig

D-44
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
96.11.01

3-2. ADJUSTMENT REQUIREMENTS LIST

Ref.
Adjustment Item Requirements Adjusting Point Page
Max. Exposure Lamp 100 to 127V areas: 81 ± 1 V
Control panel D-48
Voltage 200 to 240V areas: 162 ± 2 V
Optimum Exposure Setting Kodak Gray Scale:
in the Manual Exposure no image of the 1st step, Control panel D-51
Mode faint image of the 2nd step
Optimum Exposure Setting
Control panel D-52
in the Auto Exposure Mode
Multi Bypass Table
(100 %) 20 ± 2 mm Multi Bypass Table D-55
Reference Position
1st Drawer Reference
(100 %) 20 ± 2 mm Drawer Front Panel D-56
Position
2nd Drawer Reference
(100 %) 20 ± 2 mm Drawer Front Panel D-56
Position
Full Size Leading Edge
(100 %) 20 ± 1.5 mm Control panel D-58
Registration
Enlargement Leading Edge
(200 %) 40 ± 3 mm Control panel D-60
Registration
Reduction Leading Edge
(50 %) 10 ± 1.5 mm Control panel D-61
Registration
Image Leading Edge Erase
0.5 to 6.5 mm Control panel D-62
Width
Adjusting Screw for
Edge Erase Lamp Position 1 ± 0.5 mm D-64
Edge Erase Lamp position
Adjustment of the Original
Control panel D-68
Size Detecting Board

Control Panel Indication

Different indications are given on the control panel (Zoom Ratio Indicator, etc.) between EP2010 and
EP1083. For details, see Service Mode in Switches on PWBs.

D-45
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
96.11.01

1151SBD0303A
3-3. ADJUSTMENT OF SWITCHES
Microswitches
The following microswitches are used in various parts of this copier.

Blue
Yellow

Red Red

Wiring for the NO Type Wiring for the NC Type

NC (Normally-Closed) : Current flows between NC and COM when the actuator is open.
NO (Normally-Open) : Current flows between NO and COM when the actuator is closed.
COM (Common) : Common contact for NC and NO

Requirement
The gap between the switch and actuator should be 0.1 mm to
Actuator
0.5 mm when the actuator is closed.

COM
NC
0.1 mm to NO
0.5 mm

Out-of-Adjustment (When the actuator is closed)

D If the gap between the switch and actuator is too big, current does not at times flow to NC or NO.
D If there is no gap between the switch and actuator, the actuator is bent or the switch can be broken.

D-46
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
96.11.01

(1) Adjustment of Front Door Interlock Switch S21

1. Open the Right Door.
2. Remove the Middle Right Cover. (4 screws)

3. Remove the Upper Right Cover. (2 screws)

4. Remove the Right Cover. (2 screws)

5. Swing down the Front Door.

6. Remove the I/U Lock Lever. (1 screw)
7. Remove the Interlock Switch Cover. (2 screws)

8. Loosen the two screws that secure Front Door Interlock

Switch S21. Move S21 as far toward the front side of the
copier as it will go and temporarily secure it in position.
9. Gently swing the Front Door closed and then tighten the
two S21 mounting screws to specification.

D The Switch is wired for the NO type.

D-47
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
96.11.01

3-4. ELECTRICAL/IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS

(1) Adjustment of the Maximum Exposure Lamp Voltage for the Manual
Mode
z Requirement
D Maximum Exposure Lamp voltage: 81 ± 1V (RMS value)
z Important
D After the maximum Exposure Lamp voltage has been adjusted, be sure to make the following adjust-
ments: Optimum Exposure Setting in the Manual Mode and Optimum Exposure Setting in the Auto
Mode.
1. Remove the Large Cover. (3 screws)
2. Insert the probes of the multimeter into the receptacles of
the Exposure Lamp voltage measurement connector.

3. On the control panel, press the Stop Key, Multi-Copy Key

“0,” Stop Key, and Multi-Copy Key “1,” in that order, to set
the copier into a state ready to enter a particular Tech. Rep.
Mode.
4. Press Multi-Copy Key “1” and then “3” to set the copier into
the F3 Test Mode. (At this time, the Magnification Ratio In-
dicator shows the currently set value and the Multi-Copy
Display shown “F3.”)

5. Press the Full Size Key to select the Lamp voltage setting
mode. (The Magnification Ratio Indicator shows “L + cur-
rent setting.”)
6. Press the Start Key to light up the Exposure Lamp and, us-
ing the Zoom Up/Down Keys, adjust to obtain the Lamp
voltage of 81V.

7. Press the Stop Key to stop the F3 operation. (Or, the op-
eration will be automatically completed in about 30 sec.)
8. Press the Panel Reset Key twice (or turn OFF the Power
Switch) to return the copier back into the normal mode.
NOTE
For the Root Mean Square values and Mean values, see
p. 48-50. Most testers, voltmeters, or multimeters used in
the field show only the mean values.

D-48
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
96.11.01

When using the testers, voltmeters, or multimeters which show only the mean value, not Rms values, carry
out the following procedure.

1. Measure the line voltage.

2. Referring to the Mean Value Chart corresponding to each voltage area, see the figure under the volt-
age obtained in step 1.

If the line voltage is 125 V and Rms value is 81 V, for example, the mean value is 54.5 V.
Therefore, it is recommended that the voltage be adjusted so that the mean value is set as close to 54.5
V as possible.

MEAN VALUE
CHART FOR 115/120/127V AREAS
V 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113
Rms
MEAN
81.0 60.7 60.3 60.0 59.7 59.2 59.0 58.5 58.2 58.0 57.7 VALUE

V 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123
Rms
MEAN
81.0 57.3 57.0 56.8 56.5 56.2 56.0 55.7 55.5 55.2 55.0 VALUE

V 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133
Rms
MEAN
81.0 54.7 54.5 54.3 54.2 54.0 53.7 53.5 53.2 53.0 52.8 VALUE

V 134 135 136 137 138 139 140

Rms
MEAN
81.0 52.7 52.5 52.2 52.1 52.0 51.7 51.5 VALUE

D-49
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
96.11.01

MEAN VALUE
CHART FOR 200/220/240V AREAS

V 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189
Rms
MEAN
162.0 135.9 135.2 134.5 133.8 133.2 132.6 131.9 131.4 130.8 130.2 VALUE

V 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199
Rms
MEAN
162.0 129.7 129.1 128.6 128.1 127.6 127.1 126.6 126.1 125.7 125.2 VALUE

V 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209
Rms
MEAN
162.0 124.7 124.2 123.9 123.5 123.1 122.7 122.2 121.9 121.5 121.1 VALUE

V 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219
Rms
MEAN
162.0 120.7 120.4 120.0 119.7 119.2 119.0 118.6 118.2 118.0 117.6 VALUE

V 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229
Rms
MEAN
162.0 117.2 117.0 116.7 116.4 116.1 115.7 115.5 115.2 114.9 114.6 VALUE

V 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239
Rms
MEAN
162.0 114.2 114.0 113.7 113.5 113.2 112.9 112.7 112.4 112.1 111.9 VALUE

V 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249
Rms
MEAN
162.0 111.6 111.4 111.1 110.9 110.6 110.4 110.2 109.9 109.7 109.5 VALUE

V 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259
Rms
MEAN
162.0 109.2 109.0 108.7 108.6 108.2 108.1 107.9 107.7 107.5 107.2 VALUE

V 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269
Rms
MEAN
162.0 107.1 106.9 106.6 106.4 106.2 106.0 105.7 105.6 105.4 105.2 VALUE

V 270 271 272 273 274

Rms
MEAN
162.0 105.1 104.9 104.7 104.5 104.2 VALUE

D-50
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
96.11.01

(2) Adjustment of the Optimum Exposure Setting in the Manual Mode

z Requirement
D When the manual exposure setting is at the central indication, no image of step no. 1 of a Kodak Gray
Scale should be produced on the copy, but a faint image of step no. 2 should be produced.

No image of Faint image of 1139D270AA

step no. 1 step no. 2

z Important
D This adjustment should be carried out only after completing “Adjustment of the Maximum Exposure
Lamp Voltage for the Manual Mode” and “Adjustment of the Aperture Blades.”

1. Place the Kodak Gray Scale lengthwise, face down, and

at the center on the Original Glass. Place a sheet of pure
white A3 or 11” 17” paper over it and then lower the Orig-
inal Cover.
2. Set the copier into the Manual Exposure Mode. Set the Ex-
posure Setting to the central or fifth indication and enter 15
copies to be made by using the Multi-Copy Keys. (Use A3
paper.)
3. Press the Start Key.
Check that the 15th copy meets the requirement given
above.

4. If the exposure is out of adjustment, press the Stop Key,

Multi-Copy Key “0,” Stop Key, and Multi-Copy Key “1,” in
that order, to set the copier into a state ready to enter a par-
ticular Tech. Rep. Mode.
5. Press Multi-Copy Key “1” and then “3” to set the copier into
the F3 Test Mode. (At this time, the Magnification Ratio In-
dicator shows the currently set value and the Multi-Copy
Display shows “F3.”)

6. Using the Zoom Up/Down Keys, vary the value on the

Magnification Ratio Indicator as necessary.
7. After the adjustment has been made, press the Panel Re-
set Key twice (or turn OFF the Power Switch) to return the
copier back into the normal mode.
NOTE
Increase the value to make the image lighter.
Decrease the value to make the image darker.

D-51
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
96.11.01

(3) Adjustment of the Optimum Exposure Setting in the Auto Mode

z Important
D This adjustment must be made after the optimum exposure setting in the Manual Mode has been ad-
justed.
1. Place about five sheets of A3 or 11” 17” paper on the
Original Glass and lower the Original Cover.

2. On the control panel, press the Stop Key, Multi-Copy Key

“0,” Stop Key, and Multi-Copy Key “1,” in that order, to set
the copier into a state ready to enter a particular Tech. Rep.
Mode.
3. Press Multi-Copy Keys “1” and “5” to set the copier into the
F5 Test Mode. (At this time, the Multi-Copy Display shows
“F5.”)

4. Press the Start Key to let the copier make the adjustment.
5. After the adjustment has been made, press the Panel Re-
set Key twice (or turn OFF the Power Switch) to return the
copier back into the normal mode.

NOTE
Pressing the Start Key lets the copier make the adjustment of optimum exposure setting.
During the adjustment, the Start Key is lit up orange. It turns to green as soon as the adjustment is com-
pleted. (It takes about 5 sec. to make the adjustment.) The Full Size Key can be used to alternately dis-
play on the Magnification Ratio Indicator either the adjusting value (AE Sensor memory level) or the
voltage value (AE Sensor output).

D-52
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
96.11.01

(4) Adjustment of the ATDC Sensor

z Important
D This adjustment is not necessary when a new Imaging Unit has been installed. (The ATDC Sensor is
automatically adjusted when the starter is charged and the Power Switch turn ON.)
D The adjustment must be made whenever the currently used Imaging Unit has been charged with new
starter.
1. Load the starter.

2. On the control panel, press the Stop Key, Multi-Copy Key

“0,” Stop Key, and Multi-Copy Key “1,” in that order, to set
the copier into a state ready to enter a particular Tech. Rep.
Mode.
3. Press Multi-Copy Keys “1” and “8” to set the copier into the
F8 Test Mode. (At this time, the Multi-Copy Display shows
“F8.”)

4. Press the Start Key to let the copier make the ATDC Sen-
sor adjustment automatically. (It takes about 5 min. for the
copier to complete the adjustment procedure.)
5. After the adjustment has been made, press the Panel Re-
set Key twice (or turn OFF the Power Switch) to return the
copier back into the normal mode.

NOTE
The I/U Counter available from the Consumables counter menu is automatically reset when the ATDC
Sensor gain adjustment has been completed.
The Full Size key can be used to alternately display the data on the Magnification Ratio Indicator, either
the ATDC Sensor output voltage or ATDC Sensor gain.

D-53
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
96.11.01

(5) Adjustment of the Aperture Blades

z Requirement
D There should be no dark or light bands running in the feeding direction on copies produced. (Adjust to
obtain the mean image density for all areas.)
z Important
D If dark and light bands running in the feeding direction occur on copies, make this adjustment after
checking the following.
1) The Drum Charge Corona Wire, Grid Mesh, and Image Transfer Corona Wire are free of dirt.
2) The surfaces of the Mirrors and Lens are free of dirt.
3) The surfaces of the Exposure Lamp and Main Erase Lamp are free of scratches and dirt.
4) The Cleaning Blade is free of waviness.
1. Make a copy under the following control panel settings.
Original : A3 or A4 crosswise,
11” 17” or 11” 8-1/2” crosswise
Paper : A3 or A4 crosswise,
11” 17” or 11” 8-1/2” crosswise
Magnification : 100 %
ratio
Exposure : Manual (setting convenient for check)

2. Remove the Original Glass.

3. Turn the copy on the Copy Tray around as shown to re-
verse the leading and trailing edges and align it with the
Aperture Blades.

4. Adjust to obtain the mean image density for all areas of the
copy.

NOTE
To make the image darker, move the Aperture Blade to-
ward the Auxiliary Reflector.
To make the image lighter, move the Aperture Blade away
from the Auxiliary Reflector.

D-54
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
96.11.01

(6) Adjustment of the Manual Bypass Table Reference Position

z Requirement

D Ready a test chart (A3 or 11” 17”) as shown on the left.

Draw a line on the chart at a point 20 mm from the right
edge as shown.

D Dimension A on the copy should measure

20 ± 2.0 mm.

1. Place the test chart face down on the Original Glass and
align its rear left corner with the marker on the Original
Width Scale on the left side of the platen.
Then, lower the Original Cover.
2. Using the Manual Bypass Table, make two full size copies.
3. Using the second copy, compare the position of the refer-
ence line on the copy with that on the test chart.

<EP1083> 4. If the line does not meet the requirement, loosen the
screws (EP2010 : three screws/EP1083 : two screws) that
secure the Manual Bypass Table and move the Table as
necessary in the direction of the arrows.

NOTE
If dimension A on the copy is smaller than 18 mm, move
the Table to the front. If it is more than 22 mm, move the
Table to the rear.
When an Automatic or Duplexing Document Feeder is
mounted, it involves changing the Original Glass. This in
turn results in the position of the Original Length Scale be-
ing slightly shifted toward the rear. This is corrected by
installing the Original Positioning Plate.

<EP2010>

1151D024AA

D-55
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
96.11.01

(7) Adjustment of the 1st/2nd (EP2010 only) Drawer Reference Position

z Requirement
D Ready a test chart (A3 or 11” 17”) as shown on the left.
Draw a line on the chart at a point 20 mm from the right
edge as shown.
D Dimension A on the copy should measure 20 ± 2.0 mm.

z Important
D If the Paper Tray of the Drawer needs to be moved for adjustment, make sure that it is moved straight,
not slantwise (as skewed feeding of paper could result).
1. Place the test chart face down on the Original Glass and
align its rear left corner with the marker on the Original
Width Scale on the left side of the platen.
Then, lower the Original Cover.
2. Using the 1st Drawer, make two full size copies.
(Use A3 or 11”  17” paper.)
3. Using the second copy, compare the position of the refer-
ence line on the copy with that on the test chart.

4. If the line does not meet the requirement, slide out the 1st
Drawer, loosen the four screws shown on the left, and
move the Paper Tray as necessary to the front or rear.
5. Using the same steps (1 through 4), adjust the reference
position of the 2nd Drawer.
NOTE
If dimension A on the copy is smaller than 18 mm, move
the Paper Tray to the rear. If it is more than 22 mm, move
the Paper Tray to the front.

D-56
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
96.11.01

(8) Adjustment of the Paper Lifting Plate Springs (2nd Drawer) : EP2010 only
z Important
D When the paper size loaded in the 2nd Drawer has been changed, be sure to replace the Springs by
referring to the Table given below. (For replacement of the Springs, see p. D-13.)
D When the Springs have been replaced, change the position of the 2nd Drawer Paper Take-Up Roll by
referring to the Table given below. (For disassembly of the Paper Take-Up Roll Unit, see p. D-11.)
D The Springs for replacement can be found on the underside of the 2nd Drawer.

[Roll Positions]

1 2 3 4 5 6

1139D029AA

2nd
Positions of 2nd Drawer Spring Installation
Drawer
Paper
2nd Drawer Take-up
SP1. 1~9 SP2. SP1. 6~9
NO Paper Size SP1. 2~5 SP1. 1 Roll
SP2.10~14 12~24 SP2. 10~11
Indication Position
1 A3/A4 SP Silver 6
2 11 17 LTR. 5
3 G.LTR 5
SP Silver
4 B4/B5 4
5 254 SP Silver 4
Edge Guide

6 3
7 FLS. 3
SP Silver
8 LTR. 3
9 A4 3
10 FLS. 2
SP Gold
11 B5 2
12 SP Gold 1
13 A5 SP Gold 1
14 INV. 1

D-57
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
96.11.01

(9) Adjustment of the Leading Edge Registration

Full Size
z Requirement
D Ready a test chart (A3 or 11” 17”) as shown on the left.
Draw a line across the test chart at a point 20 mm from
the leading edge and use it as the reference line.
Dimension A at the center on the copy should meet the
following requirements.

Mag. Ratio Dimension A (mm)

Full Size (100 %) 20.0 ± 1.5

Enlargement (200 %) 40.0 ± 3

Reduction (50 %) 10.0 ± 1.5

D Setting value range: 30 to 70

D Movement equivalent to 1 step of setting value: 0.28 mm

z Important
D After having set the copier into the Adjust Mode, make two single copies and use the second copy for
the check. (The first copy represents the data before adjustment.)
D When full size leading edge registration has been adjusted, it affects leading edge registration in the
enlargement and reduction mode. Be sure, therefore, to check for registration in these modes, too.
1. Place the test chart face down on the Original Glass and
align its rear left corner with the marker on the Original
n
Width Scale on the left side of the platen. Then, lower the
Original Cover.
2. Make two single copies in full size mode (100 %) and
check for leading edge registration on the second copy.
(If it meets the requirement, go to “Adjustment of Enlarge-
ment Leading Edge Registration.”)

D-58
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
96.11.01

3. If the registration does not meet the requirement, go to the

control panel and press the Stop Key, Multi-Copy Key “0,”
Stop Key, and Multi-Copy Key “1,” in that order, to set the
copier into a state ready to enter a particular Tech. Rep.
Mode.
4. Press the Stop Key and then press the Start Key to set the
copier into the Adjust Mode. (At this time, the Magnification
Ratio Indicator shows “A.”)

5. Press Multi-Copy Key “4” and press the Start Key. (Then,
the Magnification Ratio Indicator shows “A4” and the Multi-
Copy Display, the current setting value.)

6. Press the Clear Key to clear the current setting value.

7. With the old setting value used as reference, enter the new
setting value using the appropriate Multi-Copy Keys.
NOTE
If dimension A on the copy is smaller than 18.5 mm,
decrease the setting value.
If dimension A on the copy is greater than 21.5 mm,
increase the setting value.

8. Press the Start Key to validate the setting.

9. Press the Panel Reset Key twice (or turn OFF the Power
Switch) to return the copier back to the normal mode.
10. Make two single copies and check for leading edge regis-
tration on the second copy. (If it does not meet the require-
ment, perform steps 3 through 10 again.)

D-59
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
96.11.01

Enlargement
1. After the leading edge registration in the full size mode has
been adjusted, make two single copies in an enlargement
mode (200 %) and check for leading edge registration on
the second copy.
(If the enlargement leading edge registration meets the re-
quirement, go to “Adjustment of Reduction Leading Edge
Registration.”)

2. If the registration does not meet the requirement, go to the

control panel and press the Stop Key, Multi-Copy Key “0,”
Stop Key, and Multi-Copy Key “1,” in that order, to set the
copier into a state ready to enter a particular Tech. Rep.
Mode.
3. Press the Stop Key and then press the Start Key to set the
copier into the Adjust Mode. (At this time, the Magnification
Ratio Indicator shows “A.”)

4. Press Multi-Copy Key “5” and press the Start Key. (Then,
the Magnification Ratio Indicator shows “A 5” and the Mul-
ti-Copy Display, the current setting value.)

5. Press the Clear Key to clear the current setting value.

6. With the old setting value used as reference, enter the new
setting value using the appropriate Multi-Copy Keys.
NOTE
If dimension A on the copy is smaller than 8.5 mm,
decrease the setting value.
If dimension A on the copy is greater than 11.5 mm,
increase the setting value.

7. Press the Start Key to validate the new setting.

8. Press the Panel Reset Key twice (or turn OFF the Power
Switch) to return the copier back to the normal mode.
9. Make two single copies and check for leading edge regis-
tration on the second copy. (If it does not meet the require-
ment, perform steps 2 through 9 again.)

D-60
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
96.11.01

Reduction
1. After the leading edge registration in an enlargement
mode has been adjusted, make two single copies in a re-
duction mode (50 %) and check for leading edge registra-
tion on the second copy.

2. If the registration does not meet the requirement, go to the

control panel and press the Stop Key, Multi-Copy Key “0”.
Stop Key, and Multi-Copy Key “1”, in that order, to set the
copier into a state ready to enter a particular Tech. Rep.
Mode.
3. Press the Stop Key and then press the Start Key to set the
copier into the Adjust Mode. (At this time, the Magnification
Ration Indicator shows “A.”)

4. Press Multi-Copy Key “5” and press the Start Key. (Then,
the Magnification Ratio Indicator shows “A5” and the Multi-
Copy Display, the current setting value.)

1151D040AA

5. Press the Clear Key to clear the current setting value.

6. With the old setting value used as reference, enter the new
setting value using the appropriate Multi-Copy Keys.

NOTE
If dimension A on the copy is smaller than 8.5 mm, de-
crease the setting value.
If dimension A on the copy is greater than 11.5 mm, in-
1151D041AA crease the setting value.

7. Press the Start Key to validate the new setting.

8. Press the Panel Reset Key twice (or turn OFF the Power
Switch) to return the copier back to the normal mode.
9. Make two single copies and check for leading edge regis-
tration on the second copy. (If it does not meet the require-
ment, perform step 2 through 9 again.)

D-61
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
96.11.01

(10) Adjustment of the Image Leading Edge Erase Width

z Requirement

D Ready a test chart (A3 or 11” 17”) as shown on the left.

Paint a 20 mm-long rectangle in black at the center of the
test chart along its leading edge as shown. Adjust so that
the erase width along the leading edge of the painted
area measures 0.5 to 6.5 mm.

D Setting value range: 42 to 58

D Movement equivalent to 1 step of setting value: 0.75 mm
D Having a greater setting value results in a greater erase width.
D Having a smaller setting value results in a smaller erase width.

z Important
D This adjustment must be made after the leading edge registration adjustment has been completed.

1. Place the test chart face down on the Original Glass and
align its rear left corner with the marker on the Original
Width Scale on the left side of the platen.
Then, lower the Original Cover.
2. Make two single copies in full size mode (100 %) and
check for leading edge erase width on the second copy.

3. If the erase width does not meet the requirement, go to the

control panel and press the Stop Key, Multi-Copy Key “0,”
Stop Key, and Multi-Copy Key “1,” in that order, to set the
copier into a state ready to enter a particular Tech. Rep.
Mode.
4. Press the Stop Key and then press the Start Key to set the
copier into the Adjust Mode. (At this time, the Magnification
Ratio Indicator shows “A.”)

5. Press Multi-Copy Key “1 S 2” and press the Start Key.

(Then, the Magnification Ratio Indicator shows “A 12” and
the Multi-Copy Display, the current setting value.)

D-62
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
96.11.01

6. Press the Clear Key to clear the current setting value.

7. With the old setting value used as reference, enter the new
setting value using the appropriate Multi-Copy Keys.
NOTE
If the erase width on the copy is less than 0.5 mm,
increase the setting value.
If the erase width on the copy exceeds 6.5 mm,
decrease the setting value.

8. Press the Start Key to validate the setting.

9. Press the Panel Reset Key twice (or turn OFF the Power
Switch) to return the copier back to the normal mode.
10. Make two single copies and check for leading edge erase
width on the second copy. (If it does not meet the require-
ment, perform steps 3 through 9 again.)

D-63
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
96.11.01

(11) Adjustment of the Edge Erase Lamp Position

z Requirement
D Edge erase width: Within 1 ± 0.5 mm
z Important
D This adjustment must be made after the reference positions of the Manual Bypass Table and 1st and
2nd (EP2010 only) Drawers have been adjusted.
1. With the Original Cover raised, place a sheet of A4 or
8-1/2” 11 paper lengthwise on the Original Glass.

2. With the Original Cover raised, make a full size copy.

3. Check the erase width on the front edge and turn the edge
erase width adjusting screw as necessary to obtain an
erase width of less than 1 ± 0.5 mm.

NOTE
Loosening the screw will make the erase width smaller.
Tightening the screw will make the erase width greater.

D-64
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
96.11.01

3-5. OTHER ADJUSTMENTS

(1) Adjustment of the Scanner/Mirrors Carriage Position
z Requirement
D With the Scanner positioned correctly with reference to the upper copier frame, there should be no gap
between the Scanner/Mirrors Carriage and the Scanner/Mirrors Carriage Positioning Jig.
1. Remove the Original Cover, Original Scales, and Original
Glass.
2. Temporarily tighten the screw on the Scanner Drive Cable
Holding Bracket.

3. Align the rectangular hole in the upper copier frame with

the U-groove in the Scanner, then insert the Scanner Posi-
tioning Jig into the hole.

4. Install the Scanner/Mirrors Carriage Positioning Jig be-

tween the Scanner and Mirrors Carriage.

5. Loosen the screw that has been temporarily tightened in

step 2. Turn the helical gear of the Scan Pulley to press the
Mirrors Carriage up against the Scanner/Mirrors Carriage
Positioning Jig and the Scanner.
6. Tighten the screw on the Scanner Drive Cable Holding
Bracket.

1151D055AA

D-65
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
96.11.01

(2) Adjustment of the Gap Between the Doctor Blade and Sleeve Roller
z Requirement
D The gap between the Doctor Blade and the Sleeve Roller should be 0.35 mm ± 0.05 mm.
z Important
D Cover the PC Drum with the Drum Cloth to prevent it from being scratched.
1. Remove the Developer Scattering Prevention Plate.
2. Wipe the developer off the surface of the Sleeve Roller.

3. Install the Sleeve/Magnet Roller Positioning Jig onto the

Imaging Unit.

4. Loosen the three screws securing the Doctor Blade in

position. Insert the D.B. Adjusting Jigs into the space be-
tween the Doctor Blade and Sleeve Roller.
5. Press down the Doctor Blade until it positively contacts the
D.B. Adjusting Jigs, then tighten the three screws to se-
cure it in position.

D-66
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
96.11.01

(3) Adjustment of the PC Drum Paper Separator Fingers Position

z Requirement
D The gap between the PC Drum and the PC Drum Paper Separator Fingers should be 1.0 ± 0.5 mm when
the Separator Solenoid is in the deenergized position.
z Important
D Cover the PC Drum with the Drum Cloth to prevent it from being scratched.
D Use care not to deform the Separator Fingers during the adjustment procedure.
D Press part A shown below up against the PC Drum Paper Separator Fingers Positioning Jig for the ad-
justment (to prevent the Paper Separator Fingers from being deformed).

1. Install the Sleeve/Magnet Roller Positioning Jig, to which

the PC Drum Paper Separator Fingers Positioning Jig has
been fitted, onto the Imaging Unit.

2. Turn the set screw on each of the two Finger Holders as

necessary for the adjustment.

3. Ensure that part A contacts the PC Drum Paper Separator

Fingers Positioning Jig when the Separator Solenoid is in
the deenergized position.

D-67
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
96.11.01

(4) Adjustment of the Original Size Detecting Board

z Important
D This adjustment must be made after the Original Size Detecting Board has been replaced.
1. Lower the Original Cover with no paper on the Original
Glass.

2. On the control panel, press the Stop Key, Multi-Copy Key

“0,” Stop Key, and Multi-Copy Key “1,” in that order, to set
the copier into a state ready to enter a particular Tech. Rep.
Mode.
3. Press Multi-Copy Keys “1” and “7” to set the copier into the
F7 Test Mode. (At this time, the Multi-Copy Display shows
“F7.”)

4. Press the Start Key to let the copier make the adjustment.
NOTE
During the adjustment, the Start Key is lit up orange.
It turns to green as soon as the adjustment is completed.
(It takes about 2 sec. to make the adjustment.)

5. After the adjustment has been made, press the Panel Re-
set Key twice (or turn OFF the Power Switch) to return the
copier back into the normal mode.

D-68
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
96.11.01

4 MISCELLANEOUS
4-1. INSTALLATION OF THE PLUG-IN COUNTER MOUNTING BRACKET
(OPTION)
1. Remove the Middle Right Cover.

2. Remove the Counter Cover.

3. Remove the Upper Right Cover.
4. Remove the Right Cover.

5. Connect the Plug-In Counter Connector.

6. Secure the Plug-In Counter Mounting Bracket by tighten-

ing the two screws.

D-69
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
96.11.01

1151SBD000EA

Copyright
1996 MINOLTA CO., LTD
Printed in Japan

Use of this manual should

be strictly supervised to
avoid disclosure of
confidential information.

MINOLTA CO., LTD. 1151-7992-11 96115800

Printed in Japan
 Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 SWITCHES ON PWBs/TECH. REP. SETTINGS
96.11.01

1151SBS000AA

EP2010/EP1083

SWITCHES ON PWBs/
TECH. REP. SETTINGS
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 SWITCHES ON PWBs/TECH. REP. SETTINGS
96.11.01

1151SBS000BA

CONTENTS
1 PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING THE PWBs
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-1
1-1. Precautions for Transportation and Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-1
1-2. Precautions for Replacement and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-1

2 CONTROL PANEL KEYS AND INDICATORS

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-2
D EP2010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-2
D EP1083 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-2

3 FUNCTIONS OF SWITCHES AND OTHER PARTS ON PWBs

. . . S-6
3-1. PWB Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-6
3-2. Tech. Rep. Setting Switches Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-6

4 USER MODE
................................................ S-8
4-1. Functions Available from the User Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-8
4-2. User Mode Setting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-8
4-3. User Mode Setting Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-9

5 SERVICE MODE
............................................. S-14
5-1. Service Mode Function Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-14
5-2. Entering the Service Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-15
5-3. Settings in the Service Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-16
1. Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-16
2. Tech. Rep. Choice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-18
3. Altering Fixed Zoom Ratios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-22
4. PM Counter and Ports/Options Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-22
5. Paper Size Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-23
6. Misfeed Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-24
7. Malfunction Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-25
8. Parts/Supplies Life Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-26
9. Paper Size Input (For EP2010 Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-27
10. Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-27

6 ADJUST MODE
............................................. S-28
6-1. Functions Available in the Adjust Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-28
6-2. Entering the Adjust Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-28
6-3. Settings in the Adjust Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-29

7 FUNCTION SETTING REQUIREMENTS AT REPLACEMENT OF PARTS

. . S-31
Table of Function Setting Requirements at Replacement of Parts . . S-31

i
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 SWITCHES ON PWBs/TECH. REP. SETTINGS
96.11.01

1151SBS0100A

1 PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING THE PWBs

1151SBS0101A
1-1. Precautions for Transportation and Storage
a) Before transporting or storing the PWBs, put them in protective conductive cases or bags so that they
are not subjected to high temperature (and they are not exposed to direct sunlight).
b) Protect the PWBs from any external force so that they are not bent or damaged.
c) Once the PWB has been removed from its conductive case or bag, never place it directly on an object
that is easily charged with static electricity (such as a carpet or plastic bag).
d) Do not touch the parts and printed patterns on the PWBs with bare hands.
1151SBS0102A
1-2. Precautions for Replacement and Inspection
a) Whenever replacing the PWB, make sure that the power cord of the copier has been unplugged.
b) When the power is on, the connectors should never be plugged in or unplugged.
c) Use care not to strap the pins of an IC with a metal tool.
d) When touching the PWB, wear a wrist strap and connect its cord to a securely grounded place
whenever possible. If you cannot wear a wrist strap, touch the metal part to discharge static electricity
before touching the PWB.

S-1
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 SWITCHES ON PWBs/TECH. REP. SETTINGS
96.11.01

1151SBS0200A

2 CONTROL PANEL KEYS AND INDICATORS

* For more details, see the “Operator’s Manual” shipped with the copier.
D EP2010

À 10-Keys Mixed Original Detection Key

D Numeric keypad used for setting the D Selects the Mixed Original mode.
number of copies to be made, zoom ratio,
and Tech. Rep. mode settings. Orig. " Copy Key
D Selects the original-and-copy type.
Á Clear Key
D Clear the number-of-copies setting, zoom Manual Staple Key
ratio, choice modes setting. D Effects manual stapling of copies.

 Energy Saver Key Finishing Key

D Sets the copier into the Energy Saver D Selects the finishing type.
mode.
Auto Size Key
à Interrupt Key D Selects the Auto Size mode.
D Sets the copier into, or lets it leave, the
Interrupt mode. File Margin Key
D Selects the Margin mode.
Ä Panel Reset Key
D Resets the copier to the initial mode.
Cover Key
D Selects the Cover mode.
Å Stop Key
D Stops a multi-copy cycle or a test (F*)
Job Memory Select Key
operation.
D Calls up a job program previously stored in
memory.
Æ Start Key
D Stores a job program when used in
D Starts a multi-copy cycle or a test (F*)
combination with the Input key.
operation.

Ç Paper Select Key Job Memory Input Key

D Selects the paper source. D Stores a job program in, or erases it from,
memory.
È Zoom Ratio Select Key
D Selects a fixed zoom ratio. Drum Dehumidify Key
D Runs a Drum Dehumidify cycle.
É Zoom Up/Down Keys
D Changes the zoom ratio manually. Auxiliary Toner Replenishing Key
D Starts an auxiliary toner replenishing
Auto Exposure Mode Key sequence.
D Selects either the Auto or Manual
Exposure, or Photo mode. Meter Count Key
D Gives a display of each of the current
Exposure Control Keys counts of different electronic counters of
D Selects the exposure level. the copier.

S-2
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 SWITCHES ON PWBs/TECH. REP. SETTINGS
96.11.01

à Ä

À
Æ

S-3
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 SWITCHES ON PWBs/TECH. REP. SETTINGS
96.11.01

* For more details, see the “Operator’s Manual” shipped with the copier.
D EP1083
À 10-Keys È Auto Exposure Mode Key
D Numeric keypad used for setting the D Selects either the Auto or Manual
number of copies to be made, and Tech. Exposure, or Photo mode.
Rep. mode settings.
É Exposure Control Keys
Á Clear Key D Selects the exposure level.
D Clear the number-of-copies setting, choice
modes setting. Paper Select Key
D Selects the paper source.
 Energy Saver Key
D Sets the copier into the Energy Saver Book Key
mode.
D Selects the Book mode.

à Panel Reset Key

Finishing Mode Select Key
D Resets the copier to the initial mode.
D Selects the Sort mode.
Ä Stop Key
Auto Size Key
D Stops a multi-copy cycle or a test (F*)
D Selects the Auto Size mode.
operation.

Å Start Key Drum Dehumidify Key

D Starts a multi-copy cycle or a test (F*) D Runs a Drum Dehumidify cycle.
operation.
Auxiliary Toner Replenishing Key
Æ Zoom Ratio Select Key D Starts an auxiliary toner replenishing
D Selects a fixed zoom ratio. sequence.

Ç Zoom Up/Down Keys Meter Count Key

D Changes the zoom ratio manually. D Gives a display of the current copy count.

S-4
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 SWITCHES ON PWBs/TECH. REP. SETTINGS
96.11.01

Â
Ã

Ä
À

S-5
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 SWITCHES ON PWBs/TECH. REP. SETTINGS
96.11.01

1151SBS0300A

3 FUNCTIONS OF SWITCHES AND OTHER PARTS ON PWBs

1151SBS0301A
3-1. PWB Location

Tech. Rep. Setting Switches Board PWB-A Board

1151SBS0302A
3-2. Tech. Rep. Setting Switches Board

1151S002AA

Symbol Name Description

Trouble Reset Switch Resets all malfunctions including Exposure Lamp
S1
(C04XX) and fusing (C05XX) malfunctions.
Initialize Points Forcibly resets a misfeed or malfunction that occurred
due to incorrect operation, etc. when it cannot be reset
PJ2
by opening and closing the Front Door and turning ON
S1.
TP1 GND Test Point Ground terminal used for memory clear.
Memory Clear Test Point Initializes all data except those counted by the electronic
TP2
counters.

S-6
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 SWITCHES ON PWBs/TECH. REP. SETTINGS
96.11.01

<Clearing Procedures>
D Initialize Points PJ2
1. Turn OFF the Power Switch.
2. With PJ2 closed, turn ON the Power Switch.
3. In approx. 5 sec., open PJ2.

D Memory Clear Test Point TP2

1. Turn OFF the Power Switch.
2. With the circuit across TP1 and 2 closed, turn ON the Power Switch.
3. In approx. 5 sec., open the circuit across TP1 and 2.

NOTE
D If an erratic operation or display occurs, perform the clearing procedures in the order of PJ2 and TP2.
D When memory clear has been performed, make the necessary settings again.

<List of Data Cleared by Switches and Points>

Trouble Reset Initialize Memory Clear

Clearing Means Front Door
Switch Points Test Point
Data Cleared Open/Close
(S1) (PJ2) (TP2)
Misfeed display f f f f
Malfunction display
(excluding Exposure Lamp f f f f
and fusing malfunctions)
Malfunction display
(including Exposure Lamp and * f f f
fusing malfunctions)
Erratic operation/display * * f f
User mode * * * f
Service mode * * * f
F3/5/8 adjustment values * * * f
Adjust mode * * * f

f : Cleared * : Not cleared

S-7
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 SWITCHES ON PWBs/TECH. REP. SETTINGS
96.11.01

1151SBS0400A

4 USER MODE
D This mode is used to make various settings according to the user’s needs.
1151SBS0401A
4-1. Functions Available from the User Mode

No. Function No. Function

*0 Mixed original detection 20 Auto clear ON/OFF

4 Lightweight original 21 Energy Saver ON timing

*9 File margin 23 Auto clear for Plug-In Counter

Sort/Non-Sort switching ON/

*10 Priority paper size/source 24
OFF

12 APS/AMS/Manual priority 28 Auto power OFF timing

Special paper setting

13 Optimum exposure level *51
(1st Drawer)
Special paper setting
14 Priority manual exposure level *52
(2nd Drawer)
Special paper setting
15 Finishing mode priority *53
(3rd Drawer)
Special paper setting
*18 Priority orig. " copy type *54
(4th Drawer)

*For EP2010 only

1151SBS0402A
4-2. User Mode Setting Procedure
<Setting Procedure>
1. Hold down the Panel Reset key for about 3 seconds to set the copier into the User mode. (“U” appears
on the Zoom Ratio Indicator.)
2. From the 10-Keys, enter the number assigned to the desired function. (The number entered appears
following the letter “U” on the Zoom Ratio Indicator.)
3. Press the Start key. (Then, the current setting for that particular function appears on the Multi-Copy
Display.)
4. Press the Clear key.
5. Make a new setting.
6. Press the Start key to validate the entry of the new setting.
NOTE:
If the setting data entered is outside the specifications, it is not validated and is shown blinking.

<Resetting Procedure>
D Press the Panel Reset key to return to the Basic screen.

S-8
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 SWITCHES ON PWBs/TECH. REP. SETTINGS
96.11.01

[User Mode]
1151SBS0403A
4-3. User Mode Setting Details
1151SBS040301A

Function No. Setting (The default is Highlighted .)

U-0 <Mixed Original Detection>
*For EP2010 only Select whether to turn ON the Mixed Original Detection function or not (high-
speed processing).
ON: The copier enables its Auto Paper Selection (APS) or Auto Size Selec-
tion (AMS) function for all originals loaded in the ADF (i.e., it can make
copies from originals of assorted sizes loaded in a set).
OFF: The copier enables its APS/AMS function only for the first original
loaded in the ADF.

Data 0 1

Mixed Original Detection Mixed Original Detection

Description function ON function OFF (high-speed
processing)

U-4 <Lightweight Original>

Select whether to turn ON the Lightweight Original function or not when the
ADF is used.

Data 0 1

Normal Lightweight Original

The original is pressed The original is not pressed
Description against the Original Width against the Original Width
Scale when stopped. Scale when stopped.

U-9 <File Margin>

*For EP2010 only Select the margin making method in the File Margin mode.

Data 0 1

File Margin mode when the File Margin mode when the
Description original has a file margin. original does not have a
file margin.

S-9
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 SWITCHES ON PWBs/TECH. REP. SETTINGS
96.11.01

1151SBS040302A
[User Mode]
Function No. Setting (The default is Highlighted .)
U-10 <Priority Paper Size/Source>
*For EP2010 only Select the priority paper size or paper source selected when the copier is set
into the AMS or Manual mode.

Data Description Data Description

0 A3 (L) 10 11” x 17” (L)

1 B4 (L) 11 11” x 14” (L)
2 A4 (L) 12 Legal (L)
3 B5 (L) 13 Letter (L)
4 A5 (L) 14 5-1/2” x 8-1/2” (L)
5 FLS (L) 15 Letter (C)
6 A4 (C) 20 1st Drawer
7 B5 (C) 21 2nd Drawer
22 3rd Drawer
23 4th Drawer
Default: 15 (inch areas) / 6 (metric areas)
L : lengthwise; C : crosswise
NOTE: If a paper size or source that does not exist is selected, the 1st Drawer
(20) is automatically selected.
U-12 <APS/AMS/Manual Priority>
Select the priority copying mode that is automatically selected when the
Power Switch is turned ON or Panel Reset key is pressed.

[EP2010]

Data 0 1 2

Description APS AMS Manual

[EP1083]

Data 1 2

Description AMS Manual

U-13 <Optimum Exposure Level>

Determine the optimum exposure level in the Auto as well as the Manual
Exposure mode.

Data Description Data Description

46 Low level 4: *2.0 steps 50 Standard "0 steps

47 Low level 3: *1.5 steps 51 High level 1: +0.5 steps
48 Low level 2: *1.0 steps 52 High level 2: +1.0 steps
49 Low level 1: *0.5 steps

S-10
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 SWITCHES ON PWBs/TECH. REP. SETTINGS
96.11.01

1151SBS040303A
[User Mode]
Function No. Setting (The default is Highlighted .)
U-14 <Priority Manual Exposure Level>
Determine the priority exposure level for the Manual Exposure mode. The
level determines the priority exposure level selected when the exposure mode
is switched from the initial Auto to Manual, and when Manual Exposure is
initially selected when power is turned ON.

[Auto " Manual] [Manual]

Data Description Data Description

0 Auto " EXP.1 10 Manual EXP.1

1 Auto " EXP.2 11 Manual EXP.2
2 Auto " EXP.3 12 Manual EXP.3
3 Auto " EXP.4 13 Manual EXP.4
4 Auto " EXP.5 14 Manual EXP.5
5 Auto " EXP.6 15 Manual EXP.6
6 Auto " EXP.7 16 Manual EXP.7
7 Auto " EXP.8 17 Manual EXP.8
8 Auto " EXP.9 18 Manual EXP.9

U-15 <Finishing Mode Priority>

Determine the priority finishing mode selected when the copier is equipped
with a finishing option.

[EP2010]

Data 0 1 2 3

Sort-and-
Description Non-Sort Sort Group
Staple

[EP1083]

Data 0 1

Description Non-Sort Sort

U-18 <Priority Orig. " Copy Type>

*For EP2010 only Determine the orig. " copy type automatically selected when the Power
Switch is turned ON or Panel Reset key is pressed. The setting made in
“C-40 (Orig. " Copy Type)” available as one of the Tech. Rep. Choice
functions determines the details of orig. " copy type selected by the setting
of this function.
[When “0” is set for C-40] [When “1” is set for C-40]

Data Description Data Description

0 1á1 0 1á2
1 1á2 1 1á2
2 2á2 2 2á2
3 1 á 1 2in1 3 1 á 2 2in1
4 1 á 2 2in1 4 1 á 2 2in1

NOTE: 2in1 = Enabled when an ADF is mounted.

2 = Enabled when a Duplex Unit is mounted.

S-11
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 SWITCHES ON PWBs/TECH. REP. SETTINGS
96.11.01

1151SBS040304A
[User Mode]
Function No. Setting (The default is Highlighted .)
U-20 <Auto Clear ON/OFF>
Select whether or not to activate the auto clear (panel reset) function after the
lapse of a given period of time after a copy cycle has been completed or a key
on the control panel has been operated.

Data 0 1 2

Description Disabled Enabled: 30 sec. Enabled: 1 min.

U-21 <Energy Saver ON Timing>

Select whether or not to set the copier into the Energy Saver mode after the
lapse of a given period of time after a copy cycle has been completed or a key
on the control panel has been operated.

Data Description Data Description

1 Enabled: 1 min. · ·
2 Enabled: 2 min. · ·
· · · ·
· · 97 Enabled: 97 min.
· · 98 Enabled: 98 min.
15 Enabled: 15 min. 99 Enabled: 120 min.

NOTE: Except for 99, the setting data equals the time in minutes.
U-23 <Auto Clear for Plug-In Counter>
Select whether to activate the auto clear (panel reset) function when the Plug-
In Counter is pulled out.

Data 0 1

Description Auto clear is not activated. Auto clear is activated.

U-24 <Sort/Non-Sort Switching ON/OFF>

Select whether to enable or disable the function that automatically switches
between the Sort and Non-Sort mode depending on the number of originals
loaded in the ADF when the copier is equipped with an ADF and finishing
option.

Data 0 1

Description OFF (disabled) ON (enabled)

S-12
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 SWITCHES ON PWBs/TECH. REP. SETTINGS
96.11.01

1151SBS040305A
[User Mode]
Function No. Setting (The default is Highlighted .)
U-28 <Auto Power OFF Timing>
Select whether or not to enable the auto power OFF function that turns power
off automatically after the lapse of a given period of time after a copy cycle
has been completed or a key on the control panel has been operated.

Data Description Data Description

0 Disabled · ·
1 Enabled: 1 min. · ·
2 Enabled: 2 min. · ·
· · 97 Enabled: 97 min.
· · 98 Enabled: 98 min.
60 Enabled: 60 min. 99 Enabled: 120 min.

NOTES:
1. Except for 0 and 99, the setting data equals the time in minutes.
2. “0” cannot be selected for this function if C-41 (Auto Power OFF Disabling)
available as one of the Tech. Rep. Choice functions is set to “0.”
U-51 to 54 <Special Paper Setting>
*For EP2010 only Designates each drawer of the copier for special paper.

U-51: 1st Drawer

U-52: 2nd Drawer Data 0 1
U-53: 3rd Drawer
U-54: 4th Drawer
Description Plain paper Special paper

NOTE: The APS mode is disabled if “1” is set.

S-13
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 SWITCHES ON PWBs/TECH. REP. SETTINGS
96.11.01

1151SBS0500A

5 SERVICE MODE
D This mode is used by the Tech. Rep. to set, check, adjust, and/or program various service functions.
1151SBS0501A
5-1. Service Mode Function Tree

F1 : Paper passage test

F2 : PC Drum Charge/Image Transfer Coronas
output
F3 : Exposure Lamp voltage adjustment
F4 : Paper Separator Corona output
Test F5 : AE Sensor automatic adjustment
F6 : Edge Erase Lamp check
Service Mode No. 1 * F7 : Original Size Detecting Unit adjustment
F8 : ATDC Sensor automatic adjustment
F9 : IU check, optimum exposure adjustment
FA : Scanner/Edge Erase Lamp operation check

* C-0 : Plug-In Counter counting

C-1 : Size Counter counting
C-2 : Total Counter counting
C-4 : Maintenance Call Reminder ON/OFF
C-5 : PM Counter
C-6 : Plug-In Counter copying enable/disable
C-7 : IU 60K stop
C-15 : Toner empty stop
C-20 : Leading edge erase
C-21 : Trailing edge erase
Service Tech. Rep. C-23 : Loop length adjustment
Mode Choice C-31 : 1-sided original stop position adjustment
* C-32 : 2-sided original stop position adjustment
Service Mode No. 2
* C-33 : 2-in-1 original stop position adjustment
* C-34 : 2-in-1 original distance adjustment
C-37 : S-ADF mode original stop position
adjustment
C-38 : ADF Registration Loop adjustment
* C-40 : Orig. " copy type
C-41 : Auto power OFF disabling
C-90 : ATDC detection level

* For EP2010 only

Altering Fixed Zoom Ratios

* For EP2010 only

Service Mode No. 3

S-14
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 SWITCHES ON PWBs/TECH. REP. SETTINGS
96.11.01

PM Counter and Ports/Options Counter Service Mode No. 4

Paper Size Counter Service Mode No. 5

Service
Misfeed Counter Service Mode No. 6
Mode

Malfunction Counter Service Mode No. 7

Parts/Supplies Life Counter Service Mode No. 8

Paper Size Input Service Mode No. 9

* For EP2010 only

Display Service Mode No. 0

1151SBS0502A
5-2. Entering the Service Mode
<Procedure>
1. Perform the following steps to set the copier into the Service mode.

Press the Stop key. á Press “0.” á Press the Stop key. á Press “1.”

2. From the 10-Keys, press the number corresponding to the service mode no. assigned.
3. Perform the necessary steps for the function selected.

<Leaving the Service Mode>

D Press the Panel Reset key twice to go back to the Basic screen.

S-15
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 SWITCHES ON PWBs/TECH. REP. SETTINGS
96.11.01

1151SBS0503A
5-3. Settings in the Service Mode
1151SBS050301A
1. Test
D This function allows the Tech. Rep. to perform various functional tests and adjustments.

<Setting Procedure>
1. Enter the number assigned to the desired test from the 10-Keys. (The number appears on the Multi-
Copy Display.)
2. Press the Start key to start the test.
3. Press the Stop key to stop the test.

<Test Copy>
D A test copy can be made by entering “F3, F5” of the Test No., holding down the Stop key and pressing
the Start key.

<Leaving the Function>

D Press the Panel Reset key twice to go back to the Basic screen.

[Service Mode " Test]

Test No. Description
F1 <Paper Passage Test>
A paper passage test is carried out to check for correct sensor operation
without having to wait for the copier to complete warming up. It provides the
following two modes:
1. Normal mode (The Zoom Ratio Indicator shows “On.”)
2. Load OFF mode, in which some parts are put in an inactive state (The
Zoom Ratio Indicator shows “Off.”)

<Procedure>
1. Using the Zoom Up/Down key, select either one of the two modes.
2. Press the Start key.

<To quit>
D Press the Stop key, or the test stops when paper runs out.
F2 <PC Drum Charge/Image Transfer Coronas Output>
Do not use this test as it is only for factory adjustment.
F3 <Exposure Lamp Voltage Adjustment>
This test allows the Tech. Rep. to adjust the maximum Exposure Lamp
voltage and the optimum exposure setting in the Manual Exposure mode. (It
runs for 30 sec.)

NOTE
For details, see DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT.

F4 <Paper Separator Corona Output>

Do not use this test as it is only for factory adjustment.
F5 <AE Sensor Automatic Adjustment>
This test automatically adjusts the AE Sensor. (It runs for 5 sec.)

NOTE
For details, see DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT.

S-16
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 SWITCHES ON PWBs/TECH. REP. SETTINGS
96.11.01

[Service Mode " Test]

Test No. Description
F6 <Edge Erase Lamp Check>
This test checks whether the Edge Erase Lamp turns ON and OFF properly.
(It runs for one complete copy cycle.)

<Procedure>
D Press the Start key after the copier has completed warming up. This causes
the lamp to make a checkered pattern.
F7 <Original Size Detecting Unit Adjustment>
*For EP2010 only This test automatically adjusts the Original Size Detecting Sensors, starting
when the Start key is pressed. (It runs for 5 sec.)
F8 <ATDC Sensor Automatic Adjustment>
This test automatically adjusts the ATDC Sensor. (It runs for about 5 min.)

NOTE
For details, see DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT.

F9 <IU Check, Optimum Exposure Adjustment>

Do not use this test as it is only for factory adjustment.
FA <Scanner/Edge Erase Lamp Operation Check>
Do not use this test as it is only for factory adjustment.

– Components Energized in the Tests –

Test Operation
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 FA
Component
Main Drive Motor f f f f f f * f f *
PC Drum Drive Motor f f f f f f * f f *
Fan Motors f f f f f f * f f *
Toner Replenishing Motor * * * * * * * f * *
HV (PC Drum Charge, Image
* f * * * f * f f *
Transfer, grid)
Bias (Developing, Separator, seal) * * f f f f * f f *
Scanner f * * * * f * * f f
Paper Take-Up Roll f * * * * f * * * *
Paper Transport Rollers f * * * * f * * * *
Synchronizing Rollers f * * * * f * * * *
Exposure Lamp * * f * f f * * f *
Main Erase Lamp f f f f f f * f f *
Edge Erase Lamp * * f f f * * f * f
PC Drum Paper Separator Fingers f * * * * f * * * *
Misfeed detection f * * * * f * * * *
Malfunction detection f f f f f f f f f f
f : Energized * : Remain deenergized
*F1 : Deenergized in the load OFF mode.
*F3/5 : The Scanner stops at the TRON position.
*F6 : Turned ON and OFF alternately to make a checkered pattern.

S-17
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 SWITCHES ON PWBs/TECH. REP. SETTINGS
96.11.01

1151SBS050302A
2. Tech. Rep. Choice
D This function allows the Tech. Rep. to make various settings and adjustments.

<Setting Procedure>
1. Press “2” from the 10-Keys. (The Zoom Ratio Indicator shows “C.”)
2. Press the number assigned to the desired Tech. Rep. Choice. (The Zoom Ratio Indicator shows “C”
plus the number of the chosen function.)
3. Press the Start key. (The Multi-Copy Display shows the current setting for the chosen function.)
4. Clear the current setting using the Clear key and enter the new setting from the 10-Key Pad.
5. Press the Start key to validate the new setting.
NOTE:
If the setting is illegal, it is not validated and is shown blinking.

<Test Copy>
D A test copy can be made by entering “C” of the Tech. Rep. Choice No., holding down the Stop key and
pressing the Start key.

<Leaving the Function>

D Press the Panel Reset key twice to go back to the Basic screen.

[Service Mode " Tech. Rep. Choice]

Choice No. Setting (The default is Highlighted .)
C-0 <Plug-In Counter Counting>
*For EP2010 only Select the condition by which the Plug-In Counter count is increased.

Data 0 1

Counts the number of Counts the number of copy

Description
sheets of paper fed out. processes carried out.

NOTE: See the Count-up Table for details.

C-1 <Size Counter Counting>
Select the size of the paper to be counted by the Size Counter.

Data 0 1 2 3

Description
(Metric No count A3 A3/B4 A3/B4/FLS
areas)
11” x 17”,
Description 11” x 17”,
No count 11” x 17” 8-1/2” x 14”,
(Inch areas) 8-1/2” x 14”
11” x 14”
NOTE: See the Count-up Table for details.
C-2 <Total Counter Counting>
Select the conditions (paper size and 2-sided copying) by which the Total
Counter count is increased.

Data 0 1 2

1 count per 1
Description Multiple count-up Multiple count-up
copy cycle

NOTE: See the Count-up Table for details.

S-18
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 SWITCHES ON PWBs/TECH. REP. SETTINGS
96.11.01

[Service Mode " Tech. Rep. Choice]

Choice No. Setting (The default is Highlighted .)
<Count-up Table>

Copying 1-Sided 2-Sided

Sizes other Sizes other Manual
Set Set
Size than those than those
Bypass
set sizes set sizes
Mode Mode Mode Mode
Total
0 1 2 0 1 2 0 1 2 0 1 2
Total (mechan-
ical, electronic) 1 1 2 2 2 2 4 4 1
Size
(electronic) 0 1 1 2 0 2 2 0 0
2-Sided Total
(electronic) 0 0 1 1 2 1 1 4 0
2-Sided Size
(electronic) 0 0 0 1 1 4 0

Counting
copies 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 4 4 1
Plug-In
(mechanical) Counting
copy
cycles
1 1 2 2 2 2 4 4 1

0: No count 1: 1 count 2: 2 counts 4: 4 counts

C-4 <Maintenance Call Reminder ON/OFF>
Select whether to enable or disable the maintenance call reminder.

Data 0 1

The maintenance call The maintenance call

Description
reminder is not given. reminder is given.

C-5 <PM Counter>

Select either PM Counter or Copy Kit Counter.

Data Description

0 PM Counter

Copy Kit Counter: Copying not inhibited after the counter

1
has counted down to zero.
Copy Kit Counter: Copying inhibited after the counter
2
has counted down to zero.

NOTE: If this function is set to “2,” the copier gives an indication to replace the
IU and inhibits the initiation of a new copy cycle even if C-4 is set to “0.”

S-19
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 SWITCHES ON PWBs/TECH. REP. SETTINGS
96.11.01

[Service Mode " Tech. Rep. Choice]

Choice No. Setting (The default is Highlighted .)
C-6 <Plug-In Counter Copying Enable/Disable>
Select whether to enable or disable copying according to whether the Plug-In
Counter is plugged in or not.

Data 0 1

Permits copying even Inhibits copying when the

Description when the Plug-In Counter Plug-In Counter is not
is not plugged in. plugged in.

NOTE: Be sure to set this function to “1” when the Plug-In Counter is installed.
C-7 <IU 60K Stop>
Select whether or not to inhibit copying when IU Counter has counted 60K.

Data 0 1

Description Permits copying. Inhibits copying.

Default: 0 (inch areas) / 1 (metric areas)

C-15 <Toner Empty Stop>
Select whether or not to inhibit copying when a toner-empty condition is
detected.

Data 0 1

Description Permits copying. Inhibits copying.

NOTE: If “1” is set, the copier inhibits copying when it detects a T/C of 2% or
lower.
C-20 <Leading Edge Erase>
Varies the width of erase on the leading edge.

Data 0 1

Description Smaller width Greater width

NOTE: When the setting is changed, it results in the erase width being changed
by about 3 mm.
C-21 <Trailing Edge Erase>
Varies the width of erase on the trailing edge.

Data 0 1

Description Smaller width Greater width

NOTE: When the setting is changed, it results in the erase width being changed
by about 3 mm.

S-20
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 SWITCHES ON PWBs/TECH. REP. SETTINGS
96.11.01

[Service Mode " Tech. Rep. Choice]

Choice No. Setting (The default is Highlighted .)
C-23 <Loop Length Adjustment>
Adjust the length of the loop to be formed in paper before the Synchronizing
Rollers.

Data Description Data Description

47 Loop length about 4.9 mm 51 Loop length about 7.7 mm

48 Loop length about 5.6 mm 52 Loop length about 8.4 mm
49 Loop length about 6.3 mm 53 Loop length about 9.1 mm
50 Loop length about 7.0 mm

C-31 to 34 <Original Stop Position Adjustment>

*For EP2010 only Adjust the position at which to stop the original in each of the following ADF
modes.
C-31 : 1-sided original stop position adjustment
*C-32 : 2-sided original stop position adjustment
*C-33 : 2-in-1 original stop position adjustment
*C-34 : 2-in-1 original distance adjustment
C-37 : S-ADF mode original stop position adjustment
C-38 : ADF Registration Loop adjustment

Data 43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Adjustment
*7 mm . . . . . . . . . . . . "0 mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . +8 mm
Value

NOTE: The stop position is farther away from the Original Width Scale (or a
greater distance between 2-in-1 originals) in the + direction.
C-40 <Orig. " Copy Type>
*For EP2010 only Determine the orig. " copy types that can be selected in the “Priority Orig. "
Copy Type” available from the User mode.

Data 0 1

Only the types involving

All orig. " copy types can
Description 2-sided copy can be
be selected.
selected.

C-41 <Auto Power OFF Disabling>

Select whether to enable or disable the setting of “0: Disabled” for “Auto
Power OFF Timing” available from the User mode.

Data 0 1

Description Disabled Enabled

C-90 <ATDC Detection Level>

Select the ATDC control level (T/C ratio).

Data Description Data Description

48 T/C ratio 4.0 % 51 T/C ratio 5.5 %

49 T/C ratio 4.5 % 52 T/C ratio 6.0 %
50 T/C ratio 5.0 % 53 T/C ratio 6.5 %

S-21
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 SWITCHES ON PWBs/TECH. REP. SETTINGS
96.11.01

1151SBS050303A
3. Altering Fixed Zoom Ratios (For EP2010 Only)
D This function allows the Tech. Rep. to change the fixed zoom ratios over the range between X0.500
and X2.000 according to the needs of the user.

<Setting Procedure>
1. Select the Altering Fixed Zoom Ratios function.
2. Select the particular fixed zoom ratio to be changed and press the Clear key to clear it.
NOTE:
If the zoom ratio is cleared mistakenly, press the Panel Reset key to undo the clearing operation.
3. Enter the desired zoom ratio from the 10-Keys.
4. Press the Start key to validate the new zoom ratio.

1151SBS050304A
4. PM Counter and Ports/Options Counter
D This function shows the counts of the PM Counter (IU) and Ports/Options Counter. The particular port
or option is indicated by the corresponding LED of the Misfeed Monitor. The count is shown across
the “Zoom Ratio Indicator” and “Multi-Copy Display.”
NOTE: The PM Counter is indicated by the IU Service Life Indicator LED.

Multi-Copy Display Zoom Ratio Indicator

Example) Count: 12345
123 45

Counting System
D PM Counter: Count-down type (When the counter has
counted down to zero, a * (minus) sign appears in the Zoom
Ratio Indicator and the count is thereafter incremented.
D Ports/Options Counter: Count-up type

<Setting Procedure>
1. Select the PM Counter and Ports/Options Counter function.
2. Each press of the Paper Select key lights up a new LED representing the new counter in the following
order.

[EP2010]

Order Description Order Description

1 PM Counter 6 Manual bypass
2 1st Drawer 7 Duplex take-up
3 2nd Drawer 8 Sorter
4 3rd Drawer (Paper Feed Cabinet) 9 Stapling
5 4th Drawer (Paper Feed Cabinet) 10 ADF
NOTE: PF-104, if the copier is so equipped, is indicated by the 3rd Drawer LED only.

[EP1083]

Order Description
1 PM Counter
2 Copier paper source
3 Manual bypass
4 Sorter
5 ADF

S-22
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 SWITCHES ON PWBs/TECH. REP. SETTINGS
96.11.01

<Setting a PM Counter Count>

1. Show the count of the PM Counter (IU Service Life Indicator) and clear it.
2. Enter the desired count from the 10-Keys.
NOTE
Press the Stop key to undo the clearing command.
3. Press the Start key to validate the new count setting.

<Clearing a Count>
D Show the count of the counter to be cleared and press the Clear key. If a count is mistakenly cleared,
press the Stop key to undo the clearing command.

1151SBS050305A
5. Paper Size Counter
D This function shows the counts of different sizes of paper.
The paper size is indicated by the Paper Select LED. The count is shown across the “Zoom Ratio
Indicator” and “Multi-Copy Display.”

Example) Count: 12345 Multi-Copy Display Zoom Ratio Indicator

123 45

<Setting Procedure>
1. Select the Paper Size Counter function.
2. Each press of the Paper Select key lights up a new LED representing the new counter in the following
order.

[EP2010: Metric areas] [EP2010: Inch areas]

Order Description Order Description

1 A3 1 Legal
2 A4 2 Letter
3 A5 3 11” x 17”
4 B4 4 11” x 14”
5 FLS 5 Invoice
6 Inch 6 Metric

[EP1083: Metric areas] [EP1083: Inch areas]

Order Description Order Description

1 A3 1 Legal
2 A4 2 Letter
3 A5 3 11” x 17”
4 B4 4 11” x 14”
5 FLS 5 Invoice

<Clearing a Count>
D Show the count of the counter to be cleared and press the Clear key. If a count is mistakenly cleared,
press the Stop key to undo the clearing command.

S-23
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 SWITCHES ON PWBs/TECH. REP. SETTINGS
96.11.01

1151SBS050306A
6. Misfeed Counter
D This function shows the number of misfeeds that have occurred at different locations in the copier
(count-up type counter). The Monitor Display tells the location of the misfeed by a lit LED. The count
is shown on the Zoom Ratio Indicator and the misfeed code is given on the Multi-Copy Display.

Example) Misfeed location: Manual bypass Zoom Ratio Indicator Multi-Copy Display
Count: 123 123 J

<Setting Procedure>
1. Select the Misfeed Counter function.
2. Each press of the Paper Select key lights up a new LED representing the new counter in the following
order.

[EP2010]

Order Description Order Description

1 Manual bypass J 10 Storage/transport J
2 1st Drawer J 11 Storage J
3 2nd Drawer J 12 Sorter J
4 3rd Drawer (Paper Feed Cabinet) J 13 ADF (take-up) JA
5 4th Drawer (Paper Feed Cabinet) J 14 ADF (transport) Jb
6 Duplex take-up/transport J 15 ADF (exit) Jc
7 Paper take-up/transport J 16 ADF (turnover) Jd
8 Separator J 17 ADF (single feed) JE
9 Exit J
NOTE: PF-104, if the copier is so equipped, is indicated by the 3rd Drawer LED.

[EP1083]

Order Description
1 Manual bypass J0
2 Copier paper take-up/transport J0
3 Take-up/transport J1
4 Separator J2
5 Exit J3
6 Sorter J
7 ADF JA~JE

<Clearing a Count>
D Show the count of the counter to be cleared and press the Clear key. If a count is mistakenly cleared,
press the Stop key to undo the clearing command.

S-24
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 SWITCHES ON PWBs/TECH. REP. SETTINGS
96.11.01

1151SBS050307A
7. Malfunction Counter
D This function shows the number of malfunctions that have occurred at different locations in the copier
(count-up type counter). The Zoom Ratio Indicator shows the malfunction code, while the Multi-Copy
Display shows the count.

Example) ATDC Sensor malfunction (F30) Zoom Ratio Indicator Multi-Copy Display
Count: 12 F30 12

<Setting Procedure>
1. Select the Malfunction Counter function.
2. Each press of the Paper Select key shows the count of a new counter in the following order.
NOTE: The count is given only if it is not “0.” If all counts are “0,” the message “All 0” is shown.

Order Malfunction Code Description

1 000 A Main Drive Motor malfunction
2 010 A PC Drive Moter malfunction
3 04C A Cooling Fan Motor malfunction
4 070 A Toner Replenishing Motor malfunction
5 400 An Exposure Lamp malfunction
6 500 An abnormally low fusing temperature during warm-up
7 510 An abnormally low fusing temperature after completion of warm-up
8 520 An abnormally high fusing temperature
9 600 A Scanner drive system malfunction
10 610 A Lens drive system malfunction
11 620 A Mirror drive system malfunction
12 900 A 1st Drawer malfunction
13 950 A 2nd Drawer malfunction
14 990 A Paper Feed Cabinet Main Tray malfunction
15 998 A Paper Feed Cabinet Shift Tray malfunction
16 F02 An Original Size Detecting Unit malfunction
17 F10 An AE Sensor malfunction
18 F30 An ATDC Sensor malfunction
19 F79 A Paper Empty Sensor malfunction
20 FE1 An Original Size Detecting Sensor malfunction
21 b10 A Sorter Paper Clamp Unit moving malfunction
22 b30 A Sorter Paper Aligning Motor malfunction
23 b50 A Sorter Staple Unit malfunction
24 b60 A Sorter Bin moving mechanism malfunction
25 d00 A Duplex Unit Guide Plates malfunction
26 d20 A Duplex Unit entrance port switching failure
27 d50 A Duplex Drive Motor malfunction
28 E1 A starter charging failure
29 E2 An ATDC automatic adjustment/IU fuse blowing failure
30 Ar1 Copier watchdog
31 Ar2 ADF watchdog
32 Ar3 Sorter watchdog

*For EP1083, the counter counts are shown in the order of 1 to 11, 17, 18, and 28 to 32.
<Clearing a Count>
D Show the count of the counter to be cleared and press the Clear key. If a count is mistakenly cleared,
press the Stop key to undo the clearing command.

S-25
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 SWITCHES ON PWBs/TECH. REP. SETTINGS
96.11.01

1151SBS050308A
8. Parts/Supplies Life Counter
D This function shows the number of copy processes to which different parts or supplies have been
subjected (count-up type). Each count is given as shown below.

Example) IU Counter
Count: 1234567

Zoom Ratio Multi-Copy

Indicator Display

IU 12
Shown alternately

345 67

<Setting Procedure>
1. Select the Parts/Supplies Life Counter function.
2. Each press of the Paper Select key shows the count of a new counter in the following order.

Order Zoom Ratio Indicator Description

1 IU IU Counter
2 Pc PC Drum Counter
3 St Developer Counter
4 Cb Cleaning Blade Counter
5 Fu Fusing Unit Counter

<Clearing a Count>
D Show the count of the counter to be cleared and press the Clear key. If a count is mistakenly cleared,
press the Stop key to undo the clearing command.
NOTE:
The IU Counter cannot be cleared under this function. However, the counts of all counters except the
Fusing Unit Counter under this counter function are cleared when the starter charging sequence is com-
pleted.

S-26
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 SWITCHES ON PWBs/TECH. REP. SETTINGS
96.11.01

1151SBS050309A
9. Paper Size Input (For EP2010 Only)
D This function allows the Tech. Rep. to enter the size of the paper loaded in each drawer (except the
1st Drawer which is a Universal Tray).

<Setting Procedure>
1. Select the Paper Size Input function.
2. Each press of the Paper Select key shows a new paper size in the following order.

Order Zoom Ratio Indicator Multi-Copy Display Description

1 2F 2nd Drawer length
2 2C 2nd Drawer width
3 3F 3rd Drawer (Paper Feed Cabinet) length
Current paper size
4 3C 3rd Drawer (Paper Feed Cabinet) width
5 4F 4th Drawer (Paper Feed Cabinet) length
6 4C 4th Drawer (Paper Feed Cabinet) width

NOTE: For PF-104, use 3F and 3C for the size input.

3. Show the paper size to be set and press the Clear key to clear the current size.
4. From the 10-Keys, enter the new paper size.

1151SBS050310A
10. Display
D This function is used to check the time it takes the copier to complete different functions and to make
a control panel display test and sensor check.

<Setting Procedure>
1. Select the Display function.
2. From the 10-Keys, enter the number (0, 1, 2, 6, or 7) corresponding to the item to be checked/set.

[Service Mode " Display]

Display Function Setting
<Warm-up time>
d0 The warm-up time is shown on the Zoom Ratio Indicator
(in units of 100 ms).
<First copy time>
d1 The first copy time is shown on the Zoom Ratio Indicator
(in units of 100 ms).
<Multiple copy time>
d2 The multiple copy time is shown on the Zoom Ratio Indicator
(in units of 100 ms).
<Display test>
d6 All LEDs on the control panel are turned ON and OFF (blinking) for
checking operations.
<Sensor check>
When a misfeed or malfunction occurs, this function is used to make a
sensor check to isolate the possible faulty spot.
d7
NOTE
For details, see TROUBLESHOOTING.

S-27
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 SWITCHES ON PWBs/TECH. REP. SETTINGS
96.11.01

1151SBS0600A

6 ADJUST MODE
D The Adjust mode is used to adjust the optical system at the factory. Use this mode only when the RAM
Board (PWB-R) has been replaced and memory clear performed. Whenever PWB-R has been
replaced or memory clear performed, be sure to input the values indicated on the Adjust Mode Label
on the inside of the Front Door.

1151SBS0601A
6-1. Functions Available in the Adjust Mode

Function Function
Name Name
Code Code

A0 Lens focal length correction A5 Reduction registration adjustment

Book-B scan registration

A1 Lens full size position correction A6
adjustment
Enlargement registration
A2 Mirror full size position correction A11
adjustment
Feeding-direction zoom ratio Leading edge erase width
A3 A12
correction adjustment
Trailing edge erase width
A4 Full size registration adjustment A13
adjustment

1151SBS0602A
6-2. Entering the Adjust Mode
<Procedure>
1. Perform the following steps to set the copier into the Service mode.

Press the Stop key. á Press “0.” á Press the Stop key. á Press “1.”

2. Perform the following steps to set the copier into the Adjust mode.

Press the Stop key. á Press the Start key.

3. From the 10-Keys, press the number corresponding to the adjust mode function to be used.
(The function code appears on the zoom ratio indicator.)
4. Press the Start key. Then, the adjustment data appears on the Multi-Copy Display.
5. Using the Clear key, clear the current adjustment data setting and enter the desired data from the
10-Keys.
6. Press the Start key to validate the new data.
NOTE:
If the setting is illegal, it is not validated and is shown blinking.

<Test Copy>
D A test copy can be made by entering “A” of the Adjust Mode No., holding down the Stop key and
pressing the Start key.

<Leaving the Adjust Mode>

D Press the Panel Reset key twice to go back to the Basic screen.

S-28
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 SWITCHES ON PWBs/TECH. REP. SETTINGS
96.11.01

1151SBS0603A
6-3. Settings in the Adjust Mode
[Service Mode " Adjust Mode]
Adjust Mode Setting
A0 Lens focal length Corrects variations in the Lens focal length (according to the grouping
correction of the Lenses).

Data 49 50 51
Description Short focal length Standard (0) Long focal length
(*) (+)

A1 Lens full size Corrects the zoom ratio in the crosswise direction by varying the Lens
position correction full size position.

Data 42 .... 50 .... 57

+26 steps . . . . +58 steps . . . . +86 steps
Description
(Reduction (Enlargement
direction) direction)

A2 Mirror full size Corrects the optical path length of the Mirror for the Lens focal length.
position correction
Data 42 .... 50 .... 57
+46 steps . . . . +110 steps . . . . +166 steps
Description
(Reduction (Enlargement
direction) direction)

A3 Feeding-direction Correct the zoom ratio in the feeding direction by varying the scan
zoom ratio speed.
correction
Data 42 .... 50 .... 58
–3.2% . . . . "0% .... +3.2%
Description
(Reduction (Enlargement
direction) direction)

A4 Full size Corrects registration between the leading edge of the original and that
registration of the image in the full size mode by varying the Synchronizing Roller
adjustment start timing.

Data 30 .... 50 .... 70

*5.6 mm . . . . "0 mm .... +5.6 mm
Description
(Smaller (Greater
deviation) deviation)

S-29
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 SWITCHES ON PWBs/TECH. REP. SETTINGS
96.11.01

[Service Mode " Adjust Mode]

Adjust Mode Setting
A5 Reduction Corrects registration between the leading edge of the original and that
registration of the image in a reduction mode by varying the Synchronizing Roller
adjustment start timing.

Data 30 .... 50 .... 70

*5.6 mm . . . . "0 mm .... +5.6 mm
Description
(Smaller (Greater
deviation) deviation)

A6 Book-B scan Corrects the registration between the leading edge of the original and
registration that of the image in Book-B scan by varying the Synchronizing Roller
adjustment start timing.

Data 30 .... 50 .... 70

*5.6 mm . . . . "0 mm .... +5.6 mm
Description
(Smaller (Greater
deviation) deviation)

A11 Enlargement Corrects registration between the leading edge of the original and that
registration of the image in an enlargement mode by varying the Synchronizing
adjustment Roller start timing.

Data 30 .... 50 .... 70

*5.6 mm . . . . "0 mm .... +5.6 mm
Description
(Smaller (Greater
deviation) deviation)

A12 Leading edge Corrects the leading edge erase width by varying the Image Erase
erase width Lamp ON timing.
adjustment
Data 42 .... 50 .... 58
*6 mm . . . . "0 mm .... +6 mm
Description
(Smaller (Greater
width) width)

A13 Trailing edge Corrects the trailing edge erase width by varying the Image Erase
erase width Lamp ON timing.
adjustment
Data 40 .... 50 .... 60
*7.2 mm . . . . "0 mm .... +7.2 mm
Description
(Smaller (Greater
width) width)

S-30
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 SWITCHES ON PWBs/TECH. REP. SETTINGS
96.11.01

1151SBS0700A

7 FUNCTION SETTING REQUIREMENTS AT REPLACEMENT OF PARTS

D If a part is replaced as part of troubleshooting and other service jobs, some parts require that a Test
operation be run and data values reentered and/or cleared.

Replacement Part
RAM PC Developer Cleaning Fusing Exposure
IU
Board Drum *1 Blade Rollers Lamp *2
Function
Memory clear f
Initialize f
Job program f
User mode f
Tech. Rep. Choice f
Test F3 f f
Test F5 f f
Test F8 f f f
PM Counter f
Clearing Parts/
Service mode

Supplies Life f
Counter “Pc”
Clearing Parts/
Supplies Life
Counter “St”
Clearing Parts/
Supplies Life f
Counter “Cb”
Clearing Parts/
Supplies Life f
Counter “Fu”
Adjust mode f
*1 : Including the replacement of the ATDC Sensor f : Required
*2 : Including the cleaning of Lamp Regulator and optical system.

S-31
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 SWITCHES ON PWBs/TECH. REP. SETTINGS
96.11.01

1151SBS000EA

Copyright
1996 MINOLTA CO., LTD
Printed in Japan

Use of this manual should

be strictly supervised to
avoid disclosure of
confidential information.

MINOLTA CO., LTD. 1151-7997-11 96115700

Printed in Japan
 Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
96.11.01

1151SBT000AA

EP2010/EP1083

TROUBLESHOOTING
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
96.11.01

1151SBT000BA

CONTENTS
*Only when options are used

1 INTRODUCTION

1-1. General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-1

1-2. How to Use This Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-1
1-3. Reading the Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-1

2 I/O PORT CHECK

2-1. Method for Checking the Control Parts with Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-2
2-2. I/O Port Check List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-4

3 PAPER TRANSPORT FAILURE

1. Paper Misfeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-12

1-1. Misfeed Detected When Copier is Turned ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-16
1-2. Copier Take-Up Misfeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-18
*1-3. PF-204 Take-Up Misfeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-21
1-4. PF-104 Take-Up Misfeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-24
1-5. Bypass Port Misfeed (*Multi Bypass Table) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-27
1-6. Transport/Separator Misfeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-29
1-7. Fusing/Exit Misfeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-32
*1-8. Duplex Unit Vertical Transport Misfeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-34
*1-9. Duplex Unit Take-Up Misfeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-37
2. Wrinkles in Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-40
3. Double Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-40
4. Skewed Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-41

4 MALFUNCTIONS

1. Self-Diagnostic Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-42

1-1. C0000: Main Drive Motor’s failure to turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-49
C0001: Main Drive Motor turning at abnormal timing
1-2. C0010: PC Drive Motor’s failure to turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-51
C0011: PC Drive Motor turning at abnormal timing
1-3. C004C: Cooling Fan Motor’s failure to turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-53
1-4. C0070: Toner Replenishing Motor’s failure to turn . . . . . . . . . . . T-55
C0071: Toner Replenishing Motor turning at abnormal
timing
1-5. C0400: Exposure Lamp’s failure to turn ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-57
C0410: Exposure Lamp turning ON at abnormal timing

i
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
96.11.01

1-6. C0500: Warming-up failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-59

C0510: Abnormally low fusing temperature
C0520: Abnormally high fusing temperature
1-7. C0600: Scanner Motor malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-61
C0610: Lens Motor malfunction
C0620: Mirror Motor malfunction
*1-8.C0900: 3rd Drawer Lift-Up Sensor malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-63
C0904: 3rd Drawer Lift-Up Motor malfunction
C0950: 4th Drawer Lift-Up Sensor malfunction
C0954: 4th Drawer Lift-Up Motor malfunction
1-9. C0901: 3rd Drawer Lift-Up Sensor malfunction (Inch Area) . . . T-65
C0902: 3rd Drawer Lower Limit Sensor malfunction
(Inch Area)
C0903: 3rd Drawer Lower Limit Sensor malfunction
(Inch Area)
C0951: 4th Drawer Lift-Up Sensor malfunction (Inch Area)
C0952: 4th Drawer Lower Limit Sensor malfunction (Inch Area)
C0953: 4th Drawer Lower Limit Sensor malfunction (Inch Area)
*1-10. C0990: Main Tray Upward Motion Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-67
C0991: Main Tray Downward Motion Failure
C0992: Main Tray Downward Motion Failure
C0993: Main Tray Upward Motion Failure
C0994: Main Tray Elevator Motor M26’s Failure to Turn
*1-11. C0998: Shift Transfer Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-69
C0999: Shift Return Failure
C099A: Shift Return Failure
C099b: Shift Transfer Failure
C099C: Shift Motor M27’s Failure to Turn
*1-12. C099E: Shift Gate position detecting failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-71
C099F: Shift Gate position detecting failure
C0996: 3rd Drawer Lock Release Failure
C0F79: Paper Empty Sensor Failure
1-13. C0d00: Duplex Unit Front/Rear Edge Guide Plates home
position detection failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-73
C0d20: Duplex Unit Trailing Gate Unit home position
detection failure
C0d50: Duplex Unit Drive Motor’s failure to turn
C0d51: Duplex Unit Drive Motor turning at abnormal timing
1-14. C0F10: Faulty AE Sensor level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-75
C0F30: ATDC Sensor malfunction
1-15. C0F02: Original size detection error (Defective CPU) . . . . . . . T-77
C0FE1 To C0FFF: Original Size Detecting Sensor failure
2. Power is not Turned ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-79
3. E1, E2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-81

ii
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
96.11.01

1139SBT0100A

1 INTRODUCTION
1139SBT0101A
1-1. General Precautions
1. When servicing the copier with its covers removed, use utmost care to prevent your hands, clothing, and
tools from being caught in revolving parts including the chains and gears.
2. Before attempting to replace parts and unplug connectors, make sure that the power cord of the
copier has been unplugged from the wall outlet.
3. Never create a closed circuit across connector pins except those specified in the text and on the printed
circuit.
4. When creating a closed circuit and measuring a voltage across connector pins specified in the text, be
sure to use the green wire (GND).
5. When the user is using a word processor or personal computer from a wall outlet of the same line, take
necessary steps to prevent the circuit breaker from opening due to overloads.
6. Keep all disassembled parts in good order and keep tools under control so that none will be lost or
damaged.

1139SBT0102A
1-2. How to Use This Book
1. If a component on a PWB or any other functional unit including a motor is defective, the text only instructs
you to replace the whole PWB or functional unit and does not give troubleshooting procedure applicable
within the defective unit.
2. All troubleshooting procedures contained herein assume that there are no breaks in the harnesses and
cords and all connectors are plugged into the right positions.
3. For the removal procedures of covers and parts, see DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT.
4. The troubleshooting procedures are given in the order of greater frequency of trouble or order of
operation.
5. The procedures preclude possible malfunctions due to noise and other external causes.

1139SBT0103A
1-3. Reading the Text
1. The paper transport failure troubleshooting procedures are given according to the symptom. First identify
the location where the paper is present and start the procedure for that particular location. For malfunction
troubleshooting, start with step 1 and onward.
2. Make checks in numerical order of steps and, if an item is checked okay, go to the next step.
Pattern 1 Pattern 2
Step Check Item Result Action Step Check Item Result Action
1 Is--? YES Do this. Is--? YES Do this.
↑ 1
2 Go to step 2 if it checks okay. NO Check that.
↑
Go to step 2 if it checks
2 okay.

T-1
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
96.11.01

1151SBT0200A

2 I/O PORT CHECK

1151SBT0201A
2-1. Controlled Parts Check Procedure

To allow the Tech. Rep. to easily and safely determine whether a particular controlled part is fully
operational, this copier provides the following provision: checking of the data of the I/O port on
the board IC with the copier in the standby state (including a misfeed, malfunction, and closure
failure condition) allows the Tech. Rep. to determine whether a signal is properly input to, and
output from, a controlled part.

<Procedure>
1) When a paper misfeed or malfunction occurs, identify the I/O port of the possibly defective controlled
part by reviewing the text or I/O port check list.
2) Select the I/O Check function of the Service mode and show on the Touch Panel the status of the I/O
port identified in step 1.
3) Check the input or output port data to determine whether the controlled part is operational and signals
are properly input and output.

T-2
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
96.11.01

<Controlled Part Check Procedure by Changing Input Port Data>

Example: When a paper misfeed occurs in the paper take-up section of the copier, 1st Drawer
Paper Take-Up Sensor PC55 is considered to be responsible for it.

<Procedure>
1) Remove the sheet of paper misfed.
2) From the I/O port check list, it is found that the H/L input signal to PC55 is supplied from PWB-A
(IC4A) APA1.
3) Select the I/O Check function from the Service mode menu and, using the Paper Select key,
show the status of PWB-A (IC4A) APA1 on the control panel.
4) Check that the second LED from the right of the Exposure Level Display lights up (sensor being
unblocked).

· Zoom Ratio Indicator XAPA

· Multi-Copy Display 4A

· Exposure Level Display

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

5) Move the PC55 actuator to block the sensor.

6) Check at this time that the LED goes out.
ON: PC55 is faulty. OFF: PC55 is operational.

T-3
 96.11.01
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
1151SBT0202A
2-2. Port Check List
Copier

:
1st Drawer paper take-up LED on the Monitor Display lights up.

Symbol Name Port No. Magnification Multi-Copy Manual Exposure Operation Characteristics CN/PJ No.
Ratio Indicator Display Indicator ON OFF

M1 PC Drive Motor P47 P4 1A OFF ON PJ12A-8

M1 PC Drive Motor lock signal P67 P6 ↑ When locked When turned PJ12A-7

M2 Main Drive Motor P43 P4 ↑ OFF ON PJ12A-10

M2 Main Drive Motor lock signal P66 P6 ↑ When locked When turned PJ12A-9

M3 Optical Section Cooling Fan Motor P43 P4 ↑ OFF ON PJ32A-2

M4 Suction Fan Motor P43 P4 ↑ OFF ON PJ6A-8

P61 P6 ↑ OFF ON
T-4

M5 Scanner Motor PJ16A-3

P62 ↑ ↑ ON OFF

P61 ↑ ↑ OFF ON
M6 Lens Motor PJ16A-1
P62 ↑ ↑ OFF ON

P61 ↑ ↑ ON OFF
M7 Mirror Motor PJ16A-2
P62 ↑ ↑ OFF ON

M8 Toner Replenishing Motor BPA5 BPA 4A OFF ON PJ5A-5

M9 Cooling Fan Motor OUTO OUT 5A OFF ON PJ6A-9

M9 Cooling Fan Motor lock signal APC2 APC 4A When locked When turned PJ6A-11

SL1 Separator Solenoid BPA6 BPA 4A OFF ON PJ14A-2

SL2 1st. Drawer Paper Take-Up Solenoid BPA4 BPA 4A OFF ON PJ7A-9

SL3 2nd. Drawer Paper Take-Up Solenoid BPA3 ↑ ↑ OFF ON PJ8A-2

 96.11.01
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
Symbol Name Port No. Magnification Multi-Copy Manual Exposure Operation Characteristics CN/PJ No.
Ratio Indicator Display Indicator ON OFF
SL51 Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Solenoid PB0 PB 4A OFF ON PJ12A-8
(down)

SL51 Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Solenoid PB1 ↑ ↑ OFF ON PJ12A-10

(up)

SL61 Turnover/Exit Switching Solenoid PB3 ↑ ↑ OFF ON PJ32A-2

CL1 Synchronizing Roller Clutch BPA0 BPA 4A OFF ON PJ6A-8

CL2 Paper Transport Clutch BPA1 ↑ ↑ OFF ON

PJ16A-3
CL51 Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Clutch PB2 PB 5A OFF OFF

PC10 Left Door Detecting Sensor PA3 PA1 ↑ When When

T-5

unblocked blocked PJ13A-4

PC12 Duplex Vertical Transport Sensor PA2 ↑ ↑ When When

unblocked blocked PJ21A-5

PC30 2nd Paper Exit Sensor APB7 APB 4A When When

unblocked blocked PJ13A-3

PC31 Manual Feed Paper Empty Sensor APC3 APC ↑ When When
unblocked blocked

PC51 Transport Roller Sensor APC7 ↑ ↑ When When PJ18A-6

unblocked blocked

PC53 Paper Exit Sensor APC5 ↑ ↑ When When PJ21A-2

unblocked blocked
 96.11.01
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
Symbol Name Port No. Magnification Multi-Copy Manual Exposure Operation Characteristics CN/PJ No.
Ratio Indicator Display Indicator ON OFF
PC54 Paper Leading Edge Detecting Sensor APC6 ↑ ↑ When When
unblocked blocked PJ11A-6

PC55 1st Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor APA1 APA ↑ When When
unblocked blocked PJ7A-2

PC56 2nd Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor PA5 PA1 5A When When
unblocked blocked PJ6A-7

PC57 Right Door Detecting Sensor APA0 APA 4A When When

unblocked blocked PJ16A-3

PC69 2nd Drawer Set Sensor PA7 PA1 5A When When

T-6

unblocked blocked PJ10A-2

PC81 Scanner Reference Position Sensor APB0 APB 4A When When

unblocked blocked PJ22A-1

PC86 Mirror Reference Position sensor APB2 ↑ ↑ When When

unblocked blocked PJ20A-2

PC90 Lens Reference Position Sensor APB1 APB 4A When When

unblocked blocked PJ20A-5

PC101 1st Drawer Paper Empty Sensor APA2 APA ↑ When When
unblocked blocked PJ7A-6

PC102 2nd Drawer Paper Empty Sensor PA6 PA 5A When When

unblocked blocked PJ6A-4
 96.11.01
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
Symbol Name Port No. Magnification Multi-Copy Manual Exposure Operation Characteristics CN/PJ No.
Ratio Indicator Display Indicator ON OFF
PC111 Original Cover Detecting Sensor PA2 PA ↑ When When
unblocked blocked PJ22A-6

PC112 Toner Hopper Home Position Sensor APB6 APB 4A When When
unblocked blocked PJ22A-10

PC113 Original Size Detecting Sensor FD2 PA6 PA0 5A When When
unblocked blocked
(blinking)

PC114 Original Size Detecting Sensor CD1 PA5 ↑ ↑ When When

unblocked blocked
(blinking)

PC115 Original Size Detecting Sensor FD3 PA7 ↑ ↑ When When

T-7

unblocked blocked
(blinking)

PC116 Original Size Detecting Sensor CD2 PA4 PA0 5A When When
unblocked blocked
(blinking)

PF-204, PF-104

:
3rd Drawer paper take-up LED on the Monitor Display lights up.
Symbol Name Port No. Magnification Multi-Copy Manual Exposure Operation Characteristics CN/PJ No.
Ratio Indicator Display Indicator ON OFF
M24 3rd Drawer Lift-Up Motor PA0 PA 1A OFF ON PJ10A-4

M25 PC Drive Motor lock signal P67 P6 ↑ OFF ON PJ10A-2

M26 Elevator Motor (downward) PA2 ↑ ↑ stop/upward downward PJ10A-2

M26 Elevator Motor (upward) PA3 ↑ ↑ stop/ upward PJ10A-1

downward
 96.11.01
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
Symbol Name Port No. Magnification Multi-Copy Manual Exposure Operation Characteristics CN/PJ No.
Ratio Indicator Display Indicator ON OFF
M27 Paper Shift Motor (return) PA0 ↑ ↑ stop/transfer return PJ10A-4

M27 Paper Shift Motor (transfer) PA1 ↑ ↑ stop/return transfer PJ10A-3

M28 Shift Gate Motor PB2 PB ↑ OFF ON PJ10A-5

SL41 3rd Drawer Lock Solenoid PA1 PA 2A OFF ON PJ6A-2

PC1 Shift Tray Paper Empty Sensor PD1 PD 1A When When PJ9A-9
unblocked blocked

PC2 Main Tray Lower Position Sensor PC1 PC 2A When When PJ3A-3
unblocked blocked

PC3 Shifter Home Position Sensor PC0 ↑ ↑ When When PJ3A-4

T-8

unblocked blocked

PC4 Shift Return Position Sensor PD1 PD ↑ When When PJ3A-5

unblocked blocked

PC5 Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor PF2 PF 1A When When PJ9A-5

unblocked blocked

PC6 Shift Motor Pulse Sensor PD0 PD ↑ When When PJ9A-12

unblocked blocked

PC11 Lower Left Door Set Sensor PB1 PB 2A When When PJ5A-2
unblocked blocked

PC13 Duplex Unit Turnover Path sensor PB0 ↑ ↑ When When PJ5A-5
unblocked blocked
 96.11.01
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
Symbol Name Port No. Magnification Multi-Copy Manual Exposure Operation Characteristics CN/PJ No.
Ratio Indicator Display Indicator ON OFF
PC17 Vertical Transport Detection Sensor PC3 PC 1A When When
unblocked blocked PJ8A-9A

PC18 Lower Right Door Set Sensor PE2 PE ↑ When When

unblocked blocked PJ8A-5A

PC19 3rd Drawer Lift-Up Sensor PG3 PG 1A When When

unblocked blocked PJ8A-12B

PC20 3rd Drawer Paper Empty Sensor PC0 PC ↑ When When

unblocked blocked PJ8A-2B

PC21 3rd Drawer Paper Take-Up Detection PE3 PE ↑ When When

T-9

Sensor unblocked blocked PJ8A-2A

PC22 Vertical Transport Drive Motor PC2 PC ↑ When When

unblocked blocked PJ8A-12A

PC23 4th Drawer Lift-Up Sensor PF3 PF ↑ When When

unblocked blocked PJ9A-2

PC24 4th Drawer Paper Empty Sensor PD0 PD ↑ When When

unblocked blocked PJ9A-12

PC25 3rd Drawer Set Sensor PG2 PG ↑ When When

unblocked blocked PJ8A-9B

PC26 4th Drawer Set Sensor PF2 PF ↑ When When

unblocked blocked PJ9A-5
 96.11.01
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
Symbol Name Port No. Magnification Multi-Copy Manual Exposure Operation Characteristics CN/PJ No.
Ratio Indicator Display Indicator ON OFF
PC27 3rd Drawer Lifting Motor Pulse Detection PC1 PC ↑ When When
Sensor unblocked blocked PJ8A-5B

PC28 4th Drawer Lifting Motor Pulse Detection PD1 PD ↑ When When
Sensor unblocked blocked PJ9A-9

PC29 4th Drawer Paper Take-Up Detection PB3 PB 2A When When

Sensor unblocked blocked PJ4A-2

PC34 Shift Tray Paper Empty Sensor PC1 PC 1A When When

unblocked blocked PJ3A-7

PC35 Lower Position Sensor PB3 PB 2A When When

T-10

unblocked blocked PJ3A-6

PC69 3rd Drawer Limit Sensor PO1 PO 2A When When

unblocked blocked PJ6A-3

PC70 4th Drawer Limit Sensor PC0 PC 2A When When

unblocked blocked PJ9A-3
2A

UN21 3rd Drawer Paper Descent Key PC2 ↑ 2A OFF ON PJ3A-2

PWB-E Main Tray Paper Empty Board PF3 PF 1A When When

unblocked blocked PJ9A-2
 96.11.01
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
AD-8

:
The Duplex Unit LED on the Monitor Display lights up.
Symbol Name Port No. Magnification Multi-Copy Manual Exposure Operation Characteristics CN/PJ No.
Ratio Indicator Display Indicator ON OF
M31 Duplex Unit Drive Motor PB3 PB 1A OFF ON PJ6G-2

M31 Duplex Unit Drive Motor lock signal PE1 PE ↑ When locked When turned PJ6G-1

CL31 Duplex Unit Paper Take-Up Clutch PA3 PA ↑ OFF ON PJ2G-7

SL31 Duplex Unit Gate Switching Solenoid PH1 PH ↑ OFF ON PJ3G-5

SL32 Duplex Unit Rear Finger Solenoid PH0 ↑ ↑ OFF ON PJ3G-7

PC8 Duplex Gate Home Position Sensor PE0 PE ↑ When When

unblocked blocked PJ7G-2

↑
T-11

PC9 Front/Rear Edge Guide Plate Home PC3 PC When When

Position Sensor unblocked blocked PJ7G-5

PC14 Duplex Unit Trailing Sensor PC1 ↑ ↑ When When

unblocked blocked PJ3G-2

PC15 Duplex Unit Paper Empty Sensor PC2 ↑ ↑ When When

unblocked blocked PJ2G-4

PC16 Duplex Unit Paper Take-Up Sensor PC0 ↑ ↑ When When

unblocked blocked PJ2G-9
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
96.11.01

1151SBT0300A

3 PAPER TRANSPORT FAILURE

1139SBT0201A
1. Paper Misfeed
When a paper misfeed occurs in the copier, the corresponding Misfeed Location Monitor LED on
the control panel blinks to let the user know where the misfeed has occurred. If an LED lights up
steadily, it indicates that there might be a sheet of paper present at that particular location in the
copier. If a paper misfeed occurs very frequently, carry out the necessary troubleshooting
procedures according to the location of the misfeed.

Blinking There is a misfeed at

Light that location.

There might be a
Steady sheet of paper
Light stopped at that
location.

*When option is installed

Blinking
Misfeed Location
LED
Á Copier take-up and vertical transport
*Â Paper Feed Cabinet take-up and vertical transport
À Bypass port
Ä Transport/Separator
*Å Fusing/Exit
*Æ È Duplex Unit vertical transport
*Ç Duplex Unit storage
*Â Duplex Unit take-up
*É Sorter/Staple Sorter
à Automatic/Duplexing Document Feeder

T-12
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
96.11.01

The paper misfeed, including a sheet of paper that is likely to be present, in the copier as well as in the paper
feeder options is detected by the following sensors.

Paper Leading
Edge Detecting
Sensor PC54
Paper Exit
Sensor PC53 Transport Roller
Sensor PC51
* 2nd Paper Exit
1st Drawer
Sensor PC30
Paper Take-Up
Sensor PC55

2nd Drawer
Paper Take-Up
Sensor PC56
* Duplex Vertical
* Vertical
Transport
Transport
Sensor PC12
Detection
* Duplex Unit
Sensor 3
Trailing Sensor
PC17
PC14
* Duplex Unit * Vertical
Turnover Path Transport
Sensor PC13 Detection
Sensor 4
PC22

* Duplex Unit
Paper
* 4th Drawer Take-Up
Paper Take-Up Sensor PC16
Detection
Sensor PC29
* 3rd Drawer
Paper Take-Up
Detection
Sensor PC21

T-13
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
96.11.01

D Here is an at-a-glance listing of misfeed detections made by the various sensors of the copier.
A: Misfeed Detected in Conjunction with Leading Edge Detection

Blinking LED Location Description Timer Start Sensor

Before the Paper Take-up failure Paper take-up start Paper Take-Up
Á or  Take-Up Sensor Sensor
(leading edge)
Before the Vertical Leading edge Leading edge Vertical Transport
Transport detection by detection by the Detection Sensor 4
Detection Sensor Vertical Transport Paper Take-Up (leading edge)
Â
Detection Sensor 4 Detection Sensor
of the Paper Feed
Cabinet
Before the Leading edge Leading edge Transport Roller
Transport Roller detection by the detection by the Sensor
Á Transport Roller Paper Take-Up (leading edge)
Sensor Sensor of the
copier
Before the Paper Leading edge Leading edge Paper Leading
Leading Edge detection by the detection by the Edge Detecting
Ä Detecting Sensor Paper Leading Transport Roller Sensor
Edge Detecting Sensor (leading edge)
Sensor
From Image Leading edge TRON signal Paper Exit Sensor
Å Transfer Corona to detection by the (leading edge)
Fusing Unit Paper Exit Sensor
Exit Section Leading edge Leading edge 2nd Paper Exit
detection by the detection by the Sensor
Å
2nd Paper Exit Paper Exit Sensor (leading edge)
Sensor
Before the Duplex Leading edge Leading edge Duplex Vertical
Vertical Transport detection by the detection by the Transport Sensor
Æ
Sensor Duplex Vertical Paper Exit Sensor (leading edge)
Transport Sensor
Before the Duplex Leading edge Leading edge Duplex Unit
Unit Trailing detection by the detection by the Trailing Sensor
Ç
Sensor Duplex Unit Duplex Vertical (leading edge)
Trailing Sensor Transport Sensor

T-14
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
96.11.01

B: Misfeed Detected in Conjunction with Trailing Edge Detection

Blinking LED Location Description Timer Start Sensor

Vertical Transport Trailing edge Leading edge Paper Take-Up
Section detection by the detection by the Sensor
Á
Paper Take-Up Paper Take-Up (trailing edge)
Sensor Sensor
Vertical Transport Trailing edge Trailing edge Vertical Transport
Section detection by detection by the Detection Sensor 4
Vertical Transport Paper Take-Up (trailing edge)
Â
Detection Sensor 4 Detection Sensor
of the Paper Feed
Cabinet
Near the Transport Trailing edge TRON signal Transport Roller
Roller Sensor detection by the Sensor
Ä
Transport Roller (trailing edge)
Sensor
Near the Paper Trailing edge Trailing edge Paper Leading
Leading Edge detection by the detection by the Edge Detecting
Ä Detecting Sensor Paper Leading Transport Roller Sensor
Edge Detecting Sensor (trailing edge)
Sensor
From the Suction Trailing edge Trailing edge Paper Exit Sensor
to Fusing Unit detection by the detection by the (trailing edge)
Å Paper Exit Sensor Paper Leading
Edge Detecting
Sensor
From the Fusing Trailing edge Trailing edge 2nd Paper Exit
Unit to Exit Section detection by the detection by the Sensor
Å
2nd Paper Exit Paper Exit Sensor (trailing edge)
Sensor
Duplex Unit Trailing edge Trailing edge Duplex Vertical
Vertical Transport detection by the detection by the Transport Sensor
Æ
Section Duplex Vertical Paper Exit Sensor (trailing edge)
Transport Sensor
Duplex Unit Trailing edge Leading edge Duplex Unit
Storage detection by the detection by the Trailing Sensor
È
Duplex Unit Duplex Unit (trailing edge)
Trailing Sensor Trailing Sensor

T-15
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
96.11.01

1151SBT030101A
1-1. Misfeed Detected When Copier is Turned ON

Procedure
1. Check for lit LED and remove the sheet
of paper if present at the LED location.
2. If an LED or LEDs light up again,
perform the following procedure.

Lit LED Paper Location Sensor Action

Copier 1st/2nd 1st Drawer Paper Take-Up See step 10 on p. T-20
Drawer Sensor PC55 (Copier Take-Up Misfeed
Clearing Procedure).
2nd Drawer Paper Take-Up See step 10 on p. T-20
ÀÁ Sensor PC56 (Copier Take-Up Misfeed
Clearing Procedure).
Transport Roller Transport Roller Sensor PC51 See step 14 on p. T-20
(Copier Take-Up Misfeed
Clearing Procedure).
Vertical Transport Vertical Transport Detection See step 8 on p. T-39 (Duplex
Section Sensor 3 PC17 Unit Take-Up Misfeed
Clearing Procedure).
ÁÂ
Vertical Transport Detection See step 9 on p. T-23 (Paper
Sensor 4 PC22 Feed Cabinet Take-Up
Misfeed Clearing Procedure).
Paper Feed Cabinet 3rd Drawer Paper Take-Up See step 5 on p. T-22 (Paper
Take-Up Section Detection Sensor PC21 Feed Cabinet Take-Up
Misfeed Clearing Procedure).
4th Drawer Paper Take-Up See step 5 on p. T-22 (Paper
 Detection Sensor PC29 Feed Cabinet Take-Up
Misfeed Clearing Procedure).
Duplex Unit Duplex Unit Paper Take-Up See step 7 on p. T-39 (Duplex
Take-Up Section Sensor PC16 Unit Take-Up Misfeed
Clearing Procedure).
Synchronizing Roller Paper Leading Edge See step 2 on p. T-30
Ä Detecting Sensor PC54 (Transport/Separator Misfeed
Clearing Procedure).

T-16
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
96.11.01

Lit LED Paper Location Sensor Action

Exit Section Paper Exit Sensor PC53 See step 8 on p. T-33
ÄÅ (Fusing/Exit Misfeed Clearing
Procedure).
2nd Paper Exit Sensor PC30 See step 8 on p. T-33
Å (Fusing/Exit Misfeed Clearing
Procedure).
Turnover Section Duplex Vertical Transport See step 5 on p. T-35 (Duplex
Sensor PC12 Unit Vertical Transport
Misfeed Clearing Procedure).
ÆÈ
Duplex Unit Turnover Path See step 8 on p. T-35 (Duplex
Sensor PC13 Unit Vertical Transport
Misfeed Clearing Procedure).
Duplex Unit Storage Duplex Unit Trailing Sensor See step 12 on p. T-36
PC14 (Duplex Unit Vertical
Ç
Transport Misfeed Clearing
Procedure).

T-17
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
96.11.01

1151SBT030102A
1-2. Copier Take-Up Misfeed

Symbol Name
PC51 Transport Roller Sensor
PC55 1st Drawer Paper Take-Up
Sensor
PC56 2nd Drawer Paper Take-Up
Sensor (EP2010)
SL2 1st Drawer Paper Take-Up
Solenoid
SL3 2nd Drawer Paper Take-Up
Solenoid (EP2010)
CL2 Paper Transport Clutch
PWB-A Main Control Board

1151C01TAA

T-18
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
96.11.01

z Copier Take-Up Misfeed Clearing Procedure

Symptom Step Check Item Result Action

D Paper is not taken Does the paper being used Instruct the user to use the
up at all. 1 meet product NO paper that meets product
specifications? specifications.
D Paper is
stationary before Is the paper curled, waved, Change the paper.
the Paper 2 or damp? YES Instruct the user in how to
Take-Up Sensor. store the paper.
Are the Separator Fingers Instruct the user to load the
3 on both sides of the Drawer NO paper so that it rests under
in position? the Fingers.
Are the Separator Fingers Replace the Fingers.
4 deformed? YES

Is the Trailing Edge Stop or Instruct the user in how to

5 Edge Guide in good NO position the Edge Stop or
position? Guide.
Are the Paper Lifting Change the position of the
6 Springs positioned NO Springs or add one as
correctly? necessary.
Are the Paper Take-Up Clean or replace the Paper
7 Rolls deformed, worn, or YES Take-Up Rolls.
dirty with paper dust?
Is a signal being output Adjust the Solenoid stroke.
from PWB-A to the Paper Check the Solenoid.
Take-Up Solenoid?
YES
* Does the voltage across
PJ7A-9 (1st Drawer) or
8
PJ8A-2 (2nd Drawer) on
PWB-A and GND change Replace PWB-A.
from DC24V to DC0V
when the Start Key is NO
pressed?

Is the Clutch Spring Replace the Clutch Spring.

9 deformed or worn? YES

Continued on next page

T-19
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
96.11.01

Symptom Step Check Item Result Action

D Paper is Check 1st/2nd Drawer Pa- YES Replace PWB-A.
stationary before per Take-Up Sensor
Check the Actuator for
the Vertical 10 (PC55/Pc56). See p.T-3. operation.
Transport Roller. PC55: PWB-A (IC4A) APA1 NO
PC56: PWB-A (IC5A) PA5 Check the Paper Take-Up
Sensor.
D Paper is
stationary at the Are the Vertical Transport Clean or replace the
Vertical Transport 11 Rollers deformed, worn, or YES Vertical Transport Rollers.
Roller. dirty with paper dust?
Are the Paper Take-Up Clean, correct, or replace
Guide Plate and Vertical the Guide Plate.
12 YES
Transport Guide Plate dirty
or deformed?
Is a signal being output Check the Clutch.
from PWB-A to the Clutch?
YES
* Does the voltage across
13 PJ6A-2 on PWB-A and
GND change from DC24V Replace PWB-A.
to DC0V when the Start NO
Key is pressed?

D Paper is Check Transport Roller Replace or check the

YES
stationary near Sensor PC51. See p. T-3 PWB-A.
the Transport 14 (PWB-A (IC4A) APC7).
Check the Actuator for
Roller.
NO operation.
Check PC51.
Are the Transport Rollers Clean or replace the
15 deformed, worn, or dirty YES Transport Rollers.
with paper dust?

T-20
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
96.11.01

1151SBT030103A
1-3. PF-204 Take-Up Misfeed (EP2010)
Symbol Name
PC21 3rd Drawer Paper Take-Up
Detection Sensor
PC22 Vertical Transport Detection
Sensor 4
PC29 4th Drawer Paper Take-Up
Detection Sensor
M21 Vertical Transport Drive Motor
M22 3rd Drawer Paper Take-Up
Motor
M23 4th Drawer Paper Take-Up
Motor
PWB-A Main Control Board (EP2010)
PWB-A Master Board (PF-204)

1151C19TAA

T-21
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
96.11.01

z Paper Feed Cabinet Take-Up Misfeed Clearing Procedure

Symptom Step Check Item Result Action

D Paper is not taken Does the paper being used Instruct the user to use the
up at all. 1 meet product NO paper that meets product
specifications? specifications.
D Paper is
Is the paper curled, waved, Change the paper.
stationary before
2 or damp? YES Instruct the user in how to
the Paper
store the paper.
Take-Up
Detection Sensor. Is the Paper Take-Up Motor YES Check for possible overload.
turning when the Start Key
3 Replace PWB-A or PWB-A
is pressed? (PF-204).
NO
Check the Motor.
Is the Paper Take-Up Roll Clean or replace the Paper
or Separator Roll deformed, Take-Up or Separator Roll.
4 YES
worn, or dirty with paper
dust?
D Paper is Check 3rd/4th Drawer Pa- Replace PWB-A or PWB-A
YES
stationary before per Take-Up Sensor (PF-204).
the Vertical (PC21/PC29). See p. T-3.
5 Check the Actuator for
Transport Rollers. PC21: (PF-204) PWB-A
IC1A PE3. operation.
NO
PC29: (PF-204) PWB-A Check the Paper Take-Up
IC2A PB3. Sensor.
Is Vertical Transport Drive YES Check for possible overload.
Motor M21 turning when the
6 Replace PWB-A or PWB-A
Start Key is pressed? (PF-204).
NO
Check the Motor.
Is the Vertical Transport Clean or replace the
Roller or Guide Plate Vertical Transport Roller or
7 YES
deformed, worn, or dirty Guide Plate.
with paper dust?

Continued on next page

T-22
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
96.11.01

Symptom Step Check Item Result Action

D Paper is Check Vertical Transport Replace PWB-A or PWB-A
YES
stationary near Detection Sensor 4 PC22. (PF-204).
Vertical Transport 8 See p. T-3 (PF-204) PWB-A
Check the Actuator for
Detection Sensor IC1A PC2.
NO operation and check the
4 PC22.
Sensor.
D Paper is Check Vertical Transport Replace PWB-A or PWB-A
YES
stationary before Detection Sensor 4 PC22. (PF-204).
the copier. 9 See p. T-3 (PF-204) PWB-A
Check the Actuator for
IC1A PC2.
NO operation and check the
Sensor.
Is the Vertical Transport Clean or replace the
Roller or Guide Plate YES Vertical Transport Roller or
deformed, worn, or dirty Guide Plate.
10 with paper dust?
Check the Paper Feed
NO Cabinet for positive
connection to the copier.

T-23
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
96.11.01

1151SBT030104A
1-4. PF-104 Take-Up Misfeed (EP2010)
Symbol Name
PC21 3rd Drawer Paper Take-Up
Detection Sensor
PC22 Vertical Transport Detection
Sensor 4
M21 Vertical Transport Drive Motor
M22 3rd Drawer Paper Take-Up
Motor
PWB-A Main Control Board (EP2010)
PWB-A Master Board (PF-104)

1151C20TAA

T-24
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
96.11.01

z Paper Feed Cabinet Take-Up Misfeed Clearing Procedure

Symptom Step Check Item Result Action

D Paper is not taken Does the paper being used Instruct the user to use the
up at all. 1 meet product NO paper that meets product
specifications? specifications.
D Paper is
Is the paper curled, waved, Change the paper.
stationary before
2 or damp? YES Instruct the user in how to
the Paper
store the paper.
Take-Up
Detection Sensor. Is the Paper Take-Up Motor YES Check for possible overload.
turning when the Start Key
3 Replace PWB-A or PWB-A
is pressed? (PF-104).
NO
Check the Motor.
Is the Paper Take-Up Roll Clean or replace the Paper
or Separator Roll deformed, Take-Up or Separator Roll.
4 YES
worn, or dirty with paper
dust?
D Paper is Check 3rd Drawer Paper Replace PWB-A or PWB-A
YES
stationary before Take-Up Sensor PC21. (PF-104).
the Vertical Seep. T-3.
5 Check the Actuator for
Transport Rollers. PC21: (PF-104) PWB-A
IC1A PE3. operation.
NO
Check the Paper Take-Up
Sensor.
Is Vertical Transport Drive YES Check for possible overload.
Motor M21 turning when the
6 Replace PWB-A or PWB-A
Start Key is pressed? (PF-104).
NO
Check the Motor.
Is the Vertical Transport Clean or replace the
Roller or Guide Plate Vertical Transport Roller or
7 YES
deformed, worn, or dirty Guide Plate.
with paper dust?

Continued on next page

T-25
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
96.11.01

Symptom Step Check Item Result Action

D Paper is Check Vertical Transport Replace PWB-A or PWB-A
YES
stationary near Detection Sensor 4 PC22. (PF-104).
Vertical Transport 8 See p. T-3 (PF-104) PWB-A
Check the Actuator for
Detection Sensor IC1A PC2.
NO operation and check the
4 PC22.
Sensor.
D Paper is Check Vertical Transport Replace PWB-A or PWB-A
YES
stationary before Detection Sensor 4 PC22. (PF-104).
the copier. 9 See p. T-3 (PF-104) PWB-A
Check the Actuator for
IC1A PC2.
NO operation and check the
Sensor.
Is the Vertical Transport Clean or replace the
Roller or Guide Plate YES Vertical Transport Roller or
deformed, worn, or dirty Guide Plate.
10 with paper dust?
Check the Paper Feed
NO Cabinet for positive
connection to the copier.

T-26
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
96.11.01

1151SBT030105A
1-5. Bypass Port Misfeed

Symbol Name
PC51 Transport Roller Sensor
SL51 Manual Feed Paper Take-Up So-
lenoid
CL2 Paper Transport Clutch
CL51 Manual Feed Paper Take-Up
Clutch
PWB-A Main Control Board

1151C02TAA

T-27
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
96.11.01

z Bypass Port Misfeed Clearing Procedure

Symptom Step Check Item Result Action

Does the misfeed occur Perform the troubleshooting
when the Manual Bypass procedure for
1 YES
Table is used? ”Transport/Separator
Misfeed.”
Is paper taken up and fed in Perform the troubleshooting
properly from the Drawer? procedure for ”Copier
2 NO Take-Up and
Transport/Separator
Misfeed.”
D Paper is not taken Does the paper being used Instruct the user to use the
up at all. 3 meet product NO paper that meets product
specifications? specifications.
Is the paper curled, waved, Change the paper.
4 or damp? YES Instruct the user in how to
store the paper.
Are the Paper Take-Up Adjust the stroke of the
Rolls pressed against the Solenoid.
paper stack when the Start Check the Solenoid.
YES
Key is pressed?
5
* Does the voltage across
PJ11A-2 on PWB-A and Replace PWB-A.
GND change from DC24V
NO
to DC0V when the Start
Key is pressed?
Does the voltage across Check the Clutch.
PJ7A-5 on PWB-A and YES
6 GND change from DC24V
to DC0V when the Start Replace PWB-A.
NO
Key is pressed?

Is the Pressure Pad or Clean or replace the

7 Guide Plate deformed or YES Pressure Pad or Guide
dirty? Plate.
Are the Paper Take-Up Clean or replace the Paper
8 Rolls deformed, worn, or YES Take-Up Rolls.
dirty with paper dust?
D Paper is Check Transport Roller Check the Actuator for
stationary near 9 Sensor PC51. See p. T-3 NO operation.
the Transport (PWB-A (IC4A) APC7). Check PC51.
Roller.
Does the voltage across Check the Clutch.
PJ6A-6 on PWB-A and YES
10 GND change from DC24V
to DC0V when the Start Replace PWB-A.
NO
Key is pressed?

Is the Transport Roller or Clean or replace the

Guide Plate of the copier Vertical Transport Roller or
11 YES
deformed, worn, or dirty Guide Plate.
with paper dust?

T-28
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
96.11.01

1151SBT030106A
1-6. Transport/Separator Misfeed
Symbol Name
PC51 Transport Roller Sensor
PC54 Paper Leading Edge Detecting
Sensor
SL1 Separator Solenoid
CL1 Synchronizing Roller Clutch
M3 Suction Fan Motor
PWB-A Main Control Board

1151C24TAA

T-29
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
96.11.01

z Transport/Separator Misfeed Clearing Procedure

Symptom Step Check Item Result Action

D Paper is Is the paper curled, waved, Change the paper.
stationary before 1 or damp? YES Instruct the user in how to
the Synchronizing store the paper.
Roller.
Check Paper Leading Edge YES Replace PWB-A.
Detecting Sensor PC54
2 Check the Actuator for
See p. T-3 (PWB-A (IC4A) operation.
NO
APC6).
Check PC54.
Do the Synchronizing Check the Clutch.
Rollers turn?
YES
* Does the voltage across
3
PJ6A-4 on PWB-A and Replace PWB-A.
GND change from DC24V
to DC0V after the Start NO
Key has been pressed?
Is a given length of loop Adjust the loop length or
4 formed before the NO clean or replace the
Synchronizing Roller? Transport Rollers.
D Paper is Is the Pre-Image Transfer Correct or clean the Guide
stationary near 5 Guide Plate deformed or YES Plate.
the PC Drum. dirty?
Is the Corona Unit Cleaning Place the Lever in position.
6 Lever (Lower) in correct NO
position?
Are the Image Clean or replace the Wires.
Transfer/Paper Separator
7 YES
Corona Wires deteriorated
or dirty?
Are the Paper Guides Clean or replace the Paper
8 YES
deformed or dirty? Guides.
Are the Synchronizing Clean or replace the
9 Rollers deformed, worn, or YES Synchronizing Rollers.
dirty with paper dust?
Continued on next page.

T-30
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
96.11.01

Symptom Step Check Item Result Action

D Paper is wedged Does the voltage across Adjust the Solenoid, or
at the Paper PJ14A-2 on PWB-A and check the Paper Separator
YES
Separator Fingers. 10 GND change from DC24V Fingers for operation and
to DC0V after the Start Key clearance.
has been pressed? NO Replace PWB-A.
Are the Paper Separator Correct or clean, or replace,
11 Fingers deformed or dirty? YES the Paper Separator
Fingers.
D Paper is Check Transport Roller Check the Actuator for
stationary before 12 Sensor PC51. See p. T-3 NO operation.
the Suction Belts. (PWB-A (IC4A) APC7). Check PC51.
Check Paper Leading Edge YES Replace PWB-A.
Detecting Sensor PC54.
13 Check the Actuator for
See p. T-3 operation.
NO
(PWB-A (IC4A) APC6).
Check PC54.
Do the Suction Belts turn Check the Belts and Drive
14 YES
properly? Gear.
Is Suction Fan Motor M4 Check the DC24V line.
turning when the Start Key Check M4.
is pressed? YES

15 * Does the voltage across

PJ6A-8 on PWB-A and Replace PWB-A.
GND change from DC24V
to DC0V when the Start NO
Key is pressed?

T-31
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
96.11.01

1151SBT030107A
1-7. Fusing/Exit Misfeed
Symbol Name
PC53 Paper Exit Sensor
PC30 2nd Paper Exit Sensor
PC54 Paper Leading Edge Detecting
Sensor
M3 Suction Fan Motor
PWB-A Main Control Board

1151C23TAA

T-32
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
96.11.01

z Fusing/Exit Misfeed Clearing Procedure

Symptom Step Check Item Result Action

D Paper is Is the paper curled, waved, Change the paper.
stationary before 1 or damp? YES Instruct the user in how to
the Fusing Roller. store the paper.
Is the Guide Plate dirty with Clean the Guide Plate.
2 toner? YES Check for possible
scattering of toner.
Do the Suction Belts turn Check the Belts and Drive
3 YES
properly? Gear.
Is Suction Fan Motor M4 Check the DC24V line.
turning when the Start Key Check M4.
is pressed? YES

4 * Does the voltage across

PJ6A-8 on PWB-A and Replace PWB-A.
GND change from DC24V
to DC0V when the Start NO
Key is pressed?
D The leading edge Are the Fusing Rollers Clean or replace the Rollers.
of the paper is scratched or dirty? Or, has
5 YES
stationary near the replacement time
the Fusing Roller. arrived for the Rollers?
Are the Paper Separator Clean or replace the
Fingers dirty with toner or Fingers.
6 YES
worn? Are their edges
damaged?
Is the Oil Roller dirty? Or, Clean or replace the Roller.
7 has the replacement time YES
arrived for the Roller?
D Paper is Check 1st/2nd Paper Exit Check the Actuator for
stationary after Sensor (PC53/PC30). See operation.
the Paper Exit 8 p. T-3. NO Check PC53 or PC30, or
Roller/Rolls. PC53: PWB-A (IC4A) APC5 both.
PC30: PWB-A (IC4A) APB7
Check Paper Leading Edge YES Replace PWB-A.
Detecting Sensor PC54.
9 Check the Actuator for
See p. T-3 (PWB-A (IC4A) operation.
NO
APC6).
Check PC54.

T-33
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
96.11.01

1151SBT030108A
1-8. Duplex Unit Vertical Transport Misfeed (EP2010)
Symbol Name
PC12 Duplex Vertical Transport
Sensor
PC13 Duplex Unit Turnover Path
Sensor
PC14 Duplex Unit Trailing Sensor
PC15 Duplex Unit Paper Empty
Sensor
PC53 1st Paper Exit Sensor
SL31 Duplex Unit Gate Switching
Solenoid
SL61 Turnover/Exit Switching
Solenoid
M31 Duplex Unit Drive Motor
PWB-A Main Control Board (EP2010)
PWB-A Master Board
(PF-204/PF104/PF-4D)
PWB-G Duplex Unit Master Board

T-34
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
96.11.01

z Duplex Unit Vertical Transport Misfeed Clearing Procedure

Symptom Step Check Item Result Action

D Paper is Is the paper curled, waved, Change the paper.
stationary near 1 or damp? YES Instruct the user in how to
the Exit Section. store the paper.
Does the voltage across Adjust the stroke of the
PJ13A-5 on PWB-A and YES Solenoid or check the
2 GND change from DC24V Solenoid.
to DC0V after the Start Key
has been pressed? NO Replace PWB-A.

Are the Turnover/Exit Clean or replace the Plates.

Switching Plate and Upper
3 YES
and Lower Guide Plates
deformed or dirty?
D Paper is Is drive being transmitted to YES Check for possible overload.
stationary near the Vertical Transport
the Vertical Roller of the Duplex Unit? Check the Duplex Unit drive
4 coupling or replace PWB-A
Transport Section (Is Duplex Unit Drive Motor NO
of the Duplex Unit. M31 turning after the Start (PF-204/PF-104/PF-4D)
Key has been pressed?) PWB-G, and/or M31.

Check Duplex Vertical Check the Actuator for

Transport Sensor PC12. operation.
5 NO
See p. T-3 (PWB-A (IC5A) Check PC12.
PA2).
Check 1st Paper Exit Sen- YES Replace PWB-A.
sor PC53. See p. T-3
6 Check the Actuator for
(PWB-A)(IC4A)(APC5). operation.
NO
Check PC53.
D Paper is Are the Paddle Roller, Slip Clean or replace the Roller
stationary near Roller/Rolls, and Rolls B and/or Roll.
YES
the Turnover Release Lever deformed, Check the Release Lever
Section. 7 worn, or dirty with paper mechanism.
dust? Check the drive coupling
NO
from the Duplex Unit.
Check Duplex Unit Turnover Replace PWB-A
YES
Path Sensor PC13. See p. (PF-204/PF-104/PF-4D).
8 T-3 (PF-204/PF-104/PF-4D)
Check the Actuator for
PWB-A IC2A PB0. NO
operation and PC13.

Continued on next page

T-35
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
96.11.01

Symptom Step Check Item Result Action

D The leading edge Is the Paper Guide Mylar YES Clean or replace the Mylar.
of the paper is 9 deformed or dirty?
Check the Mylar moving
stationary inside NO
mechanism.
the Duplex Unit.
Does the Gate Switching Adjust the stroke of the
Plate operate properly? Solenoid or check the
(Is Duplex Unit Gate Solenoid.
Switching Solenoid SL31 YES
energized for a paper
length of 300 mm or
10 longer?)
Replace PWB-G or PWB-A
* Does the voltage across (PF-204/PF-104/PF-4D).
PJ3G-5 on PWB-G and
NO
GND change from DC24V
to DC0V after the Start
Key has been pressed?
Check Duplex Unit Paper Check the Actuator for
YES
Empty Sensor PC15. See operation and PC14.
11 p. T-3.
Replace PWB-G or PWB-A
(AD-8) PWB-G IC1G PC2. NO
(PF-204/PF-104/PF-4D).
D Paper is Check Duplex Unit Trailing Check the Actuator for
YES
stationary near Sensor PC14. See p. T-3. operation and PC15.
the take-up port of 12 (AD-8) PWB-G IC1G PC1.
Replace PWB-G or PWB-A
the Duplex Unit. NO
(PF-204/PF-104/PF-4D).

T-36
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
96.11.01

1151SBT030109A
1-9. Duplex Unit Take-Up Misfeed (EP2010)

Symbol Name
PC16 Duplex Unit Paper Take-Up
Sensor
PC17 Vertical Transport Detection
Sensor 3
SL33 Duplex Unit Pick-Up Solenoid
CL31 Duplex Unit Paper Take-Up
Clutch
M21 Vertical Transport Drive Motor
PWB-A Master Board
(PF-204/PF-104/PF-4D)
PWB-G Duplex Unit Master Board

1151C21TAA

T-37
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
96.11.01

z Duplex Unit Take-Up Misfeed Clearing Procedure

Symptom Step Check Item Result Action

D Paper is not taken Is the paper curled, waved, Change the paper.
up at all. 1 or damp? YES Instruct the user in how to
store the paper.
Is Duplex Unit Pick-Up Adjust the stroke of the
Solenoid SL33 energized Solenoid or check the
when paper take-up is pick-up mechanism.
about to occur?
YES
* Slide out the Duplex Unit
and remove the PWB
Cover. Then, slide the
2 Duplex Unit back into the
copier. Does the voltage Replace PWB-G or PWB-A
across PJ2G-12 on (PF-204/PF-104/PF-4D).
PWB-G and GND change
from DC24V to DC0V
when the Start Key is NO
pressed in the above
condition?

Is Duplex Unit Paper Check the Clutch.

Take-Up Clutch CL31
energized when a copy is
taken up and fed into the YES
copier from the Duplex Unit?

* Slide out the Duplex Unit

and remove the PWB
3 Replace PWB-G or PWB-A
Cover. Then, slide the
Duplex Unit back into the (PF-204/PF-104/PF-4D).
copier. Does the voltage
across PJ2G-7 on PWB-G
NO
and GND change from
DC24V to DC0V when the
Start Key is pressed in
the above condition?
Are the Take-Up Roll, Feed Clean or replace the Rolls.
Roll, and Separator Roll
4 YES
deformed, worn, or dirty
with paper dust?

Continued on next page

T-38
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
96.11.01

Symptom Step Check Item Result Action

D Paper is Is Vertical Transport Drive YES Check for possible overload.
stationary near Motor M21 turning when a
Check the Duplex Unit drive
the Vertical 5 copy is taken up and fed coupling, or replace PWB-A
Transport Section. into the copier from the NO
(PF-204/PF-104/PF-4D),
Duplex Unit?
PWB-G, and/or M21.
Are the Vertical Transport Clean or replace the
Rollers and Guide Plate Vertical Transport Rollers
6 YES
deformed, worn, or dirty and Guide Plate.
with paper dust?
Check Duplex Unit Paper Check the Actuator for
7 Take-Up Sensor PC16. NO operation.
(AD-8) PWB-G IC1G PC0. Check PC16.
Check Vertical Transport Replace PWB-G or PWB-A
YES
Detection Sensor 3 PC17. (PF-204/PF-104/PF-4D).
8 See p. T-3
Check the Actuator for
(PF-204/PF-104/PF-4D)
NO operation.
PWB-A IC1A PC3.
Check PC17.

T-39
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
96.11.01

1151SBT0302A
2. Wrinkles in Paper
Step Cause Check Item Result Action
Paper Is the problem solved when Change the paper (that meets
new paper is used? product specifications).
1 YES
Instruct the user in how to
store the paper.
Paper Take-Up Is the paper taken up and Check the Drawer and Paper
Section fed in properly? Take-Up Rolls and adjust,
2 NO clean, and/or replace the parts
as necessary. (See ”Skewed
Feed” that appears later.)
Transport Section Are any of the Belts slack or Replace all Belts together or
3 YES
the Suction Deck dirty? clean the Suction Deck.
Pre-Fusing Is the Guide Plate dirty with Clean the Guide Plate.
4 Guide Plate toner or other foreign matter? YES

Thermistor Is the Thermistor damaged Clean or replace the

5 YES
or dirty with toner? Thermistor.
Is the Thermistor in positive Move the Thermistor Mounting
contact with the Upper Bracket up or down as
Fusing Roller? necessary so that the
using Unit

6 NO
Thermistor comes in positive
contact with the Upper Fusing
Roller.
Fu

Fusing Rollers Has the Roller replacement Replace the Rollers.

7 YES
time arrived?
Width of area Does the location of wrinkles Replace the two Pressure
of contact change when the position of Springs together.
between the the left and right Pressure
8 YES
Upper and Springs are changed?
Lower Fusing
Rollers

1151SBT0303A
3. Double Feed
Step Cause Check Item Result Action
Paper Is the problem solved when Change the paper (that meets
new paper is used? product specifications).
1 YES
Instruct the user in how to
store the paper.
Paper Is the Paper Take-Up Roll Clean or replace the Paper
Take-Up Roll dirty, or has its replacement YES Take-Up Roll.
time arrived?
2
Are the Paper Take-Up Rolls Change the locations of the
Section

located correctly? (For the NO Rolls according to the paper

Copier’s 1st Drawer) size being used.
er Take-Up S

Paper Is the Paper Separator Roll Clean or replace the Paper

Separator Roll dirty, or has its replacement Separator Roll.
3 YES
time arrived? (For the 3rd
and 4th Drawers)
Pape

Paper Lifting Are the correct type of Paper Change the type and position
Plate and Lifting Springs being used or of the Lifting Springs or
4 Springs are they positioned NO replace the Lifting Plate
(Copier’s 1st correctly? Or, has the Paper according to the paper size
Drawer) Lifting Plate warped? being used.

T-40
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
96.11.01

1151SBT0304A
4. Skewed Feed
Step Cause Check Item Result Action
Paper Is the problem solved when Change the paper (that meets
new paper is used? product specifications).
1 YES
Instruct the user in how to
store the paper.
Paper Is the Paper Take-Up Roll Clean or replace the Paper
Take-Up Roll dirty, or has its replacement YES Take-Up Roll.
time arrived?
2
Are the Paper Take-Up Rolls Change the locations of the
Paper Take-Up Section

located correctly? (For the NO Rolls according to the paper

Copier’s 1st Drawer) size being used
Paper Is the Paper Separator Roll Clean or replace the Paper
Separator Roll dirty, or has its replacement Separator Roll.
3 YES
time arrived? (For the 3rd
and 4th Drawers)
Paper Lifting Are the correct type of Paper Change the type and position
Plate and Lifting Springs being used or of the Lifting Springs or
4 Springs are they positioned NO replace the Lifting Plate
(Copier’s 1st correctly? Or, has the Paper according to the paper size
Drawer) Lifting Plate warped? being use
Paper Dust Is the Paper Dust Remover Clean the Paper Dust
5 Remover dirty with paper dust? YES Remover and Upper
Synchronizing Roller.
Transport Are the Transport Rollers Adjust the loop length in the
Transportt Section

Rollers dirty or worn? Or Has their Adjust Mode.

6 YES
replacement time arrived? Clean or replace the Transport
Rollers.
Synchronizing Are the Synchronizing Adjust the loop length in the
Rollers Rollers dirty or worn? Or Has Adjust Mode.
7 YES
their replacement time Clean or replace the
arrived? Synchronizing Rollers.
Suction Unit Are any of the Belts left slack Replace the three Belts at
8 or the Suction Deck dirty? YES once or clean the Suction
Deck.
Pre-Fusing Guide Is the Guide Plate dirty with Clean the Guide Plate.
9 YES
Plate toner or other foreign matter?

T-41
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
96.11.01

1151SBT0400A

4 MALFUNCTIONS
1151SBT0401A
1. Self-Diagnostic Function
The copier CPU is capable of self-diagnosis of the copier conditions and, when detecting a malfunction, it
shows the corresponding malfunction code across the Zoom Ratio Indicator and Multi-Copy Display. Each
malfunction code indicates the particular part which has developed a malfunction and the type of
malfunction. A listing follows showing all malfunction codes and the description and possible causes of each
malfunction.

Zoom Ratio Indicator Multi-Copy Display

C 0 X X X

Represents the detail of the malfunction.

Indicates the particular malfunctioning part of

the greater physical unit.

Indicates the malfunctioning physical unit.

* Copier/Paper Feed Cabinet (Option)

Code Description Possible Cause

C0000 Main Drive Motor’s failure D Defective M2
to turn D Defective PWB-A
D Overloaded rolls/roller, gear, and belt
C0001 Main Drive Motor turning D Defective M2
at abnormal timing D Defective PWB-A
C0010 PC Drive Motor’s failure to D Defective M1
turn D Defective PWB-A
D Overloaded gear
D Defective M1
Drive

C0011 PC Drive Motor turning at

abnormal timing D Defective PWB-A
C004C Cooling Fan Motor’s D Defective M9
failure to turn D Defective PWB-A
C0070 Toner Replenishing D Defective Toner Hopper Position Sensor PC112
Motor’s failure to turn D Defective M8
D Defective PWB-A
C0711 Toner Replenishing Motor D Defective Toner Hopper Position Sensor PC112
turning at abnormal timing D Defective M8
D Defective PWB-A

T-42
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
96.11.01

* Copier/Paper Feed Cabinet (Option)

Code Description Possible Cause

C0400 Exposure Lamp’s failure D LA1 out D Defective PWB-A
Exposure Lamp to turn ON D Blown Exposure Lamp D Defective Power
Thermal Fuse TS2 Supply Unit PU1
D Defective AE Sensor
C4100 Exposure Lamp turning D Defective PWB-A
ON at abnormal timing D Defective AE Sensor
D Defective Power
Supply Unit PU1
C0500 Warm-up failure D Defective PWB-A D Defective Fusing
D Defective Fusing Thermal Fuse TF1
Thermistor TH1 D Defective SSR
Fusing Unit

D Fusing Heater Lamp H1 burned out

C0510 Abnormally low fusing D Defective PWB-A D Defective Fusing
temperature D Defective Fusing Thermal Fuse TF1
Thermistor TH1 D Defective SSR
D Fusing Heater Lamp H1 burned out
C0520 Abnormally high fusing D Defective PWB-A D Defective SSR
temperature
D Defective Fusing Thermistor TH1
C0600 Scanner Motor malfunction D Defective Scanner Motor M5
D Defective Scanner Reference Position Sensor
PC81
D Defective Motor Drive Board PWB-E
D Defective PWB-A
Optical Section

C0610 Lens Motor malfunction D Defective Lens Motor M6

D Defective Lens Reference Position Sensor PC90
D Defective Motor Drive Board PWB-E
D Defective PWB-A
C0620 Mirror Motor malfunction D Defective Mirror Motor M7
D Defective Mirror Reference Position Sensor PC86
D Defective Motor Drive Board PWB-E
D Defective PWB-A
C0F10 Faulty AE Sensor level D Defective AE Sensor D Exposure Lamp A1
Board PWB-H burned out
D Defective PWB-A D Defective Power Supply
Sensors

Unit PU1
C0F30 ATDC Sensor malfunction D Defective ATDC Sensor UN3
D ATDC Sensor connection failure
D Defective PWB-A

T-43
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
96.11.01

* Malfunctions Detected by Copiers, Except in Europe

Code Description Possible Cause

C0F02 Original size detection D Defective Original Size Detecting Board UN2
error (Defective CPU) D Defective PWB-A
C0FE1 Original Size Detecting D Defective Original Size Detecting Board UN2
Sensor Ê failure D Defective Original Size Detecting Sensor
D Defective PWB-A
C0FE2 Original Size Detecting
Sensor Ë failure FD
C0FE3 Original Size Detecting A5L B5L Letter(L) A4L FLS
Sensors Ê and Ë failure
A B C D E
C0FE4 Original Size Detecting
Sensor Ì failure À Á Â
C
C0FE5 Original Size Detecting D
Sensors Ê and Ì failure
B4L A Ã
C0FE6 Original Size Detecting
Sensors Ë and Ì failure Letter(C) B Ä
cting Board

C0FE7 Original Size Detecting

Sensors Ê, Ë, and Ì
failure
Origiinal Size Detec

C0FE8 Original Size Detecting

Sensor Í failure
C0FF9 Original Size Detecting
Sensors Ê and Í failure
C0FEA Original Size Detecting
Sensors Ë and Í failure
C0FEB Original Size Detecting
Sensors Ê, Ë, and Í
failure
C0FEC Original Size Detecting
Sensors Ì and Í failure
C0FED Original Size Detecting
Sensors Ê, Ì, and Í
failure
C0FEE Original Size Detecting
Sensors Ë, Ì, and Í
failure
C0FEF Original Size Detecting
Sensors Ê, Ë, Ì, and Í
failure

T-44
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
96.11.01

* Malfunctions Detected by Copiers, Except in Europe

Code Description Possible Cause

C0FF0 Original size Detection D Defective Original Size Detecting Board UN2
Sensor Î failure D Defective PWB-A
C0FE1 Original Size Detecting D Defective Original Size Detecting Board UN2
Sensors Ê and Î failure D Defective Original Size Detecting Sensor
D Defective PWB-A
C0FE2 Original Size Detecting
Sensors Ë and Î failure
C0FE3 Original Size Detecting FD
Sensors Ê, Ë, and Î
A5L B5L Letter(L) A4L FLS
failure
C0FE4 Original Size Detecting A B C D E
Sensors Ì and Î failure
C À Á Â
C0FE5 Original Size Detecting D
Sensors Ê, Ì and Î fail-
ure
B4L A Ã
C0FE6 Original Size Detecting Letter(C) B Ä
Sensors Ë , Ì and Î
failure
cting Board

C0FE7 Original Size Detecting

Sensors Ê, Ë, Ì and Î
failure
Original Size Detec

C0FE8 Original Size Detecting

Sensors Í and Î failure
C0FF9 Original Size Detecting
Sensor Ê, Í and Î fail-
ure
C0FEA Original Size Detecting
Sensors , Ë, Í and Î
failure
C0FEB Original Size Detecting
Sensor Ê, Ë, Í and Î
failure
C0FEC Original Size Detecting
Sensors Ì, Í and Î fail-
ure
C0FED Original Size Detecting
Sensors Ê, Ì, Í and Î
failure
C0FEE Original Size Detecting
Sensors Ë, Ì, Í and Î
failure
C0FEF Original Size Detecting
Sensors Ê, Ë, Ì, Í and
Î failure

T-45
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
96.11.01

Code Description Possible Cause

C0900 3rd Drawer Lift-Up Sensor D Defective 3rd Drawer Lift-Up Sensor PC19
malfunction D Defective PWB-A (PF-204)
C0901 3rd Drawer Lift-Up Sensor
(Inch malfunction
Area)
C0902 3rd Drawer Limit Sensor D Defective 3rd Drawer Limit Sensor PC69
(Inch malfunction D Defective PWB-A (PF-204)
Area)
C0903 3rd Drawer Limit Sensor
(Inch malfunction
Area)
C0904 3rd Drawer Lift-Up Motor D Defective 3rd Drawer Lift-Up Motor M24
D Defective PWB-A (PF-201)
PF-204

malfunction
C0950 4th Drawer Lift-Up Sensor D Defective 4th Drawer Lift-Up Sensor PC23
malfunction D Defective PWB-A (PF-201)
C0951 4th Drawer Lift-Up Sensor
(Inch malfunction (Inch Area)
Area)
C0952 4th Drawer Lower Limit D Defective 4th Drawer Limit Sensor PC70
(Inch Sensor malfunction (Inch D Defective PWB-A (PF-204)
Area) Area)
C0953 4th Drawer Lower Limit
(Inch Sensor malfunction (Inch
Area) Area)
C0954 4th Drawer Lift-Up Motor D Defective 4th Drawer Lift-Up Motor M25
malfunction D Defective PWB-A (PF-201)
C0d00 Duplex Unit Front/Rear D Defective Front/Rear Edge Guide Plate Home
Edge Guide Plates home Position Sensor PC9
position detection failure D Defective Front/Rear Edge Guide Drive Motor M33
D Defective PWB-G
C0d20 Duplex Unit Trailing Gate D Defective Duplex Gate Home Position Sensor PC8
AD-8/PF-4D

Unit home position D Defective Gate Motor M32

detection failure D Defective PWB-G
C0d50 Duplex Unit Drive Motor’s D Defective Duplex Unit Drive Motor M31
failure to turn D Defective PWB-G
C0d51 Duplex Unit Drive Motor D Defective Duplex Unit Drive Motor M31
turning at abnormal timing D Defective PWB-G

T-46
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
96.11.01

Code Description Possible Cause

C0990 Main Tray upward motion Defective 3rd Drawer Paper Lift-Up Sensor PC19.
failure
C0991 Main Tray downward mo-
tion failure
C0992 Main Tray downward mo- Defective Main Tray Lower Position Sensor PC2
tion failure
C0993 Main Tray upward motion
failure
C0994 Main Tray Elevator Mo- Defective Elevator Motor M26
tor’s failure to turn
C0996 3rd Drawer lock release Defective 3rd Drawer Lock Solenoid SL41
failure
C0998 Shifter transfer failure Defective Shifter Return Position Sensor PC4
PF-104

C0999 Shifter return failure

C099A Shifter return failure Defective Shifter Home Position Sensor PC3
C099b Shifter transfer failure
C099c Shifter Motor’s failure to Defective Paper Shift Motor M27
turn
C0F79 D 3rd Drawer Paper Empty D Defective 3rd Drawer Paper Empty Sensor PC20
Sensor failure D Defective Main Tray Paper Empty Board PWB-E
D Main Tray Paper Empty D Defective Shift Tray Paper Empty Sensor PC1
Board failure
D Shift Tray Paper Empty
Sensor
C099E Shift Gate position detect- Defective Shift Gate Position Detecting Sensor PC34
ing failure
C099F Shift Gate position detect-
ing failure

T-47
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
96.11.01

* Malfunctions for Other Options

Code Description Possible Cause

C0b10 Faulty Paper Clamp Unit D Paper Clamp Motor M2
movement D Paper Clamp Home Position Sensor PC6
C0b11 Faulty Paper Clamp Unit D Paper Clamp Motor M2
movement D Paper Clamp Home Position Sensor PC6
C0b30 Paper Aligning Motor D Paper Aligning Motor M3
malfunction (Paper D Paper Aligning Home Position Sensor PC5
Aligning Bar remaining at
home position)
C0b31 Paper Aligning Motor D Paper Aligning Motor M3
malfunction (Paper D Paper Aligning Home Position Sensor PC5
ST-104

Aligning Bar not at home

position)
C0b50 Improper stapling action D Stapling Motor M4
(Stapler Arm remaining at D Stapler Home Position Detecting Switch S4
the home position)
C0b51 Improper stapling action D Stapling Motor M4
(Stapler Arm not at home D Stapler Home Position Detecting Switch S4
position)
C0b52 Improper stapling action D Paper Clamping Sensor PC8
(stapling action occurring
with no staples driven into
the paper)
C0b60 Faulty Bin movement D Bin Moving Motor M1
(Defective Bin Moving D Bin Upper Limit Interlock Switch S1
Motor) D Bin Lower Limit Interlock Switch S2
C0b61 Faulty Bin movement D Bin Moving Motor M1
(Defective drive)
ST-104/S-106

C0b62 Faulty Bin movement D Bin Positioning Sensor PC3

(Defective Bin Positioning
Sensor)
C0b63 Faulty Bin movement D Bin Lower Limit Position Sensor PC4
(Defective Bin Lower Limit
Position Sensor)
C0b64 Faulty Bin movement (M1 D Bin Moving Pulse Sensor PC1
speed detection failure)

T-48
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
96.11.01

1151SBT040101A
1-1. C0000: Main Drive Motor’s failure to turn
C0001: Main Drive Motor turning at abnormal timing
Symbol Name
M2 Main Drive Motor
PWB-A Main Control Board

1151C18TAA

T-49
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
96.11.01

Step Check Item Result Action

1 Is C0001 being shown? YES Begin with step 5.
Does M2 start to turn when the Start Check rolls/rollers and gears for
2 YES
Key is pressed? possible overload.
Does the voltage across PJ12A-10 on Replace PWB-A.
PWB-A and GND change from DC5V
3 NO
to DC0V when the Start Key is
pressed?
Does the voltage across PJ12A-9 on YES Replace M2.
4 PWB-A and GND remain DC5V when
the Start Key is pressed? NO Replace PWB-A.

Does the voltage across PJ12A-10 on Replace PWB-A.

5 PWB-A and GND remain DC0V when YES
the Power Switch is turned ON?
Does the voltage across PJ12A-9 on YES Replace M2.
6 PWB-A and GND remain DC0V when
the Power Switch is turned ON? NO Replace PWB-A.

T-50
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
96.11.01

1151SBT040102A
1-2. C0010: PC Drive Motor’s failure to turn
C0011: PC Drive Motor turning at abnormal timing
Symbol Name
M1 PC Drive Motor
PWB-A Main Control Board

1151C17TAA

T-51
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
96.11.01

Step Check Item Result Action

1 Is C0011 being shown? YES Begin with step 5.
Does M1 start to turn when the Start Check gears for possible overload.
2 YES
Key is pressed?
Does the voltage across PJ12A-8 on Replace PWB-A.
PWB-A and GND change from DC24V
3 NO
to DC0V when the Start Key is
pressed?
Does the voltage across PJ12A-7 on YES Replace M1.
4 PWB-A and GND remain DC5V when
the Start Key is pressed? NO Replace PWB-A.

Does the voltage across PJ12A-8 on Replace PWB-A.

5 PWB-A and GND remain DC0V when YES
the Power Switch is turned ON?
Does the voltage across PJ12A-7 on YES Replace M1.
6 PWB-A and GND remain DC0V when
the Power Switch is turned ON? NO Replace PWB-A.

T-52
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
96.11.01

1151SBT040103A
1-3. C004C: Cooling Fan Motor’s failure to turn
Symbol Name
M9 Cooling Fan Motor
PWB-A Main Control Board

1151C16TAA

T-53
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
96.11.01

C004C

Step Check Item Result Action

Is M9 turning at low speed when the Begin with step 3.
1 NO
Power Switch is in the ON position?
Does the voltage across PJ6A-9 on Replace M9.
YES
PWB-A and GND change from DC12V
2
to DC24V when the Start Key is Replace PWB-A.
pressed? NO

Is the voltage across PJ6A-9 on PWB- YES Replace M9.

3 A and GND DC12V when the Power
Switch is in the ON position? NO Replace PWB-A.

T-54
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
96.11.01

1151SBT040104A
1-4. C0070: Toner Replenishing Motor’s failure to turn
C0071: Toner Replenishing Motor turning at abnormal timing
Symbol Name
PC112 Toner Hopper Home Position
Sensor
M8 Toner Replenishing Motor
PWB-A Main Control Board

1151C09TAA

T-55
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
96.11.01

Step Check Item Result Action

1 Is C0071 being shown? YES Begin with step 3
Does the Toner Bottle turn when two YES Perform step 3.
2 or three copies are made with the
Original Cover raised? NO Perform step 4.

Make two or three copies with the YES Replace PWB-A.

Original Cover raised. Does the
voltage across PJ22A-10 on PWB-A Check the Bottle Holder or PC112.
3 and GND change to DC0V when the
Toner Bottle is stopped and to DC5V NO
when the Bottle is turned during the
copy cycle?
Make two or three copies with the YES Replace M8.
Original Cover raised. Does the
voltage across PJ6A-5 on PWB-A Replace PWB-A.
4 and GND change to DC0V when the
Toner Bottle is stopped and to DC24V NO
when the Bottle is turned during the
copy cycle?

T-56
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
96.11.01

1151SBT040105A
1-5. C0400: Exposure Lamp’s failure to turn ON
C0410: Exposure Lamp turning ON at abnormal timing
Symbol Name
LA1 Exposure Lamp
TF2 Exposure Lamp Thermal Fuse
PWB-A Main Control Board
PWB-H AE Sensor Board
PU1 Power Supply Unit

1151C03TAA

T-57
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
96.11.01

C0400

Step Check Item Result Action

Does LA1 light up when the Start Key Check the photo receiver of the AE
1 is pressed? YES Sensor for contamination.
Replace PWB-H or PWB-A.
Does the voltage across PJ12A-11 on Replace PWB-A.
2 PWB-A and GND become DC4.3V or NO
less when LA1 turns ON?
Disconnect CN7 (2P). Is there Check LA1 and TF2 for continuity.
3 continuity across CN7-1 and 2 on the NO
LA1 side?
Is the voltage across PJ2-1 and 2 on YES Replace PU1.
4 PU1 AC100V?
Check DC Power Supply Unit PU2 and
NO
Power Supply Board PWB-C.

C0410

Step Check Item Result Action

Does LA1 turn ON when the Power Check to see if the photo receiver of
Switch is turned ON or in the standby the AE Sensor is receiving extraneous
A NO
state? light.
Replace PWB-H or PWB-A.
Does the voltage across PJ12A-11 on Replace PWB-A.
YES
PWB-A and GND remain DC4.3V or
B
lower when the Power Switch is turned Replace PU1.
ON or in the standby state? NO

T-58
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
96.11.01

1151SBT040106A
1-6. C0500: Warm-up failure
C0510: Abnormally low fusing temperature
C0520: Abnormally high fusing temperature
Symbol Name
H1 Fusing Heater Lamp
TS1 Fusing Thermoswitch
TH1 Fusing Thermistor
PWB-A Main Control Board
UN1 SSR

1151C14TAA

T-59
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
96.11.01

C0500, C0510
* After resetting a C0510 condition, C0500 will be shown if the same problem recurs. For this reason, the
same troubleshooting procedure is used for C0500 and C0510.

Step Check Item Result Action

Does H1 light up when the Power YES Check TH1 for installation or clean it.
1 Switch is turned ON?
NO Begin with step 3.
Disconnect CN14 (4P). Is the YES Replace TH1.
2 resistance across CN14-2 and 3 on the
TH1 side infinity? NO Replace PWB-A.

Does the voltage across PJ3A-2 on Replace PWB-A.

PWB-A and GND change from DC4.5V
3 to DC0V when the Front Door is closed NO
with the Power Switch in the ON
position?
Disconnect CN5 (2P). Is there YES Replace UN1.
4 continuity across CN5-1 and 2 on the
Fusing Unit side? NO Check H1 and TF1 for continuity.

C0520

Step Check Item Result Action

Does H1 remain lit up even after the YES Begin with step B.
A copier has completed warming up?
NO Begin with step C.
Does the voltage across PJ3A-2 on Replace PWB-A.
YES
PWB-A and GND remain DC0V even
B
after the copier has completed Replace UN1.
warming up? NO

Disconnect CN14 (4P). Is the circuit YES Replace TH1.

C across CN14-2 and 3 on the Fusing
Unit side short-circuited? NO Replace PWB-A.

T-60
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
96.11.01

1151SBT040107A
1-7. C0600: Scanner Motor malfunction
C0610: Lens Motor malfunction
C0620: Mirror Motor malfunction
Symbol Name
M5 Scanner Motor
M6 Lens Motor
M7 Mirror Motor
PC81 Scanner Reference Position
Sensor
PC86 Mirror Reference Position
Sensor
PC90 Lens Reference Position Sensor
PWB-A Main Control Board
PWB-E Motor Drive Board

1151C13TAA

T-61
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
96.11.01

C0600

Step Check Item Result Action

Does the Scanner start moving after Perform step 3.
1 YES
the Power Switch has been turned ON?
Does the voltage across PJ16A-3 on Replace PWB-E or M5.
YES
PWB-A and GND change from DC5V
2
to DC0V after the Power Switch has Replace PWB-A.
been turned ON? NO

Check Scanner Reference Position Check the Scanner Drive Cable for
Sensor PC81. YES tension and overload. Or, replace
3 See p. T-3 (PWB-A (IC4A) APB0) PWB-A.
NO Check PC81.

C0610

Step Check Item Result Action

Does M6 start turning after the Power Perform step D.
A YES
Switch has been turned ON?
Does the voltage across PJ16A-1 on Replace PWB-A.
PWB-A and GND change from DC5V
B NO
to DC0V after the Power Switch has
been turned ON?
Is the voltage across PJ3E-5 on YES Replace PWB-E or M6.
C PWB-E and GND DC24V after the
Power Switch has been turned ON? NO Check the 24V line.

Check Lens Reference Position PC90. Check the Lens Drive Cable for
See p. T-3 (PWB-A (IC4A) APB1) YES tension and overload. Or, replace
D PWB-A.
NO Check PC90.

C0620

Step Check Item Result Action

I Does M7 start turning? YES Perform step III.
Does the voltage across PJ16A-2 on YES Replace PWB-E or M7.
II PWB-A and GND change from DC5V
to DC0V when the Mirror moves? NO Replace PWB-A.

Check Mirror Reference Position PC86. Check for overload. Or, replace
YES
III See p. T-3 (PWB-A (IC4A) APB2) PWB-A.
NO Check PC86.

T-62
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
96.11.01

1151SBT040108A
1-8. C0900: 3rd Drawer Lift-Up Sensor malfunction
C0904: 3rd Drawer Lift-Up Motor malfunction
C0950: 4th Drawer Lift-Up Sensor malfunction
C0954: 4th Drawer Lift-Up Motor malfunction
Symbol Name
PC19 3rd Drawer Lift-Up Sensor
PC23 4th Drawer Lift-Up Sensor
PC27 3rd Drawer Lifting Motor Pulse
Detection Sensor
PC28 4th Drawer Lifting Motor Pulse
Detection Sensor
M24 3rd Drawer Lift-Up Motor
M25 4th Drawer Lift-Up Motor
PWB-A Master Board (PF-204)

1151C12TAA

T-63
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
96.11.01

C0900, C0950

Step Check Item Result Action

1 Is C0950 being shown? YES Perform step 3.
Check 3rd Drawer Lift-Up Sensor YES Replace PWB-A (PF-204).
2 PC19.
Check the Paper Pressure Releasing
See p. T-3 (PF-204) PWB-A IC1A PG3. NO
mechanism and PC19.
Check 4th Drawer Lift-Up Sensor YES Replace PWB-A (PF-204).
3 PC23.
Check the Paper Pressure Releasing
See p. T-3 (PF-204) PWB-A IC1A PF3. NO
mechanism and PC23.

C0904, C0954

Step Check Item Result Action

A Is C0954 being shown? YES Begin with step E.
Slide out the 3rd Drawer and slide it Perform step D.
B back into the copier. Does M24 turn at YES
this time?
Does the voltage across PJ10A-3 on Replace M24.
PWB-A (PF-204) and GND change YES
C from DC0V to DC24V, and then back
to DC0V again, after the 3rd Drawer Replace PWB-A (PF-204).
NO
has been slid back into the copier?

Check 3rd Drawer Lifting Motor Pulse Replace PWB-A (PF-204). Or, check
YES
D Detecting Sensor PC27. the gears for possible overload.
See p. T-3 (PF-204) PWB-A IC1A PC1.
NO Check the Pulse Disk and PC27.
Slide out the 4th Drawer and slide it Perform step G.
E back into the copier. Does M25 turn at YES
this time?
Does the voltage across PJ10A-1 on Replace M25.
PWB-A (PF-204) and GND change YES
F from DC0V to DC24V, and then back
to DC0V again, after the 4th Drawer Replace PWB-A (PF-204).
NO
has been slid back into the copier?

Check 4th Drawer Lifting Motor Pulse Replace PWB-A (PF-204). Or, check
YES
G Detecting Sensor PC28. the gears for possible overload
See p. T-3 (PF-204) PWB-A IC1A PD1.
NO Check the Pulse Disk and PC28.

T-64
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
96.11.01

1151SBT040109A
1-9. C0901: 3rd Drawer Lift-Up Sensor malfunction *Inch Area
C0902: 3rd Drawer Lower Limit Sensor malfunction
C0903: 3rd Drawer Lower Limit Sensor malfunction
C0951: 4th Drawer Lift-Up Sensor malfunction
C0952: 4th Drawer Lower Limit Sensor malfunction
C0953: 4th Drawer Lower Limit Sensor malfunction
Symbol Name
PC19 3rd Drawer Lift-Up Sensor
PC23 4th Drawer Lift-Up Sensor
PC69 3rd Drawer Lower Limit Sensor
PC70 4th Drawer Lower Limit Sensor
PWB-A Master Bord (PF-204)

T-65
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
96.11.01

C0901, C0902, C0903

Step Check Item Result Action

1 Is C0901 being shown? YES Perform step 3.
Check 3rd Drawer Lower Limit Sensor YES Replace PWB-A (PF-204).
2 PC69.
See p. T-3 (PF-204) PWB-A IC2A PO1. NO Check the PC69.

Check 3rd Drawer Lift-Up Sensor YES Replace PWB-A (PF-204).

3 PC19.
Check the Paper Pressure Releasing
See p. T-3 (PF-204) PWB-A IC1A PG3. NO
mechanism and PC19.

C0951, C0952. C0953

Step Check Item Result Action

1 Is C0951 being shown? YES Begin with step 3.
Check 4th Drawer Lower Limit Sensor YES Replace PWB-A (PF-204)
2 PC70.
See p. T-3. (PF-204) PWB-A IC2A PC0 NO Check the PC70.

Check 4th Drawer Lift-Up sensor YES Replace PWB-A (PF-204)

3 PC23. See p. T-3.
Check the Paper Pressure Releasing
(PF-204) PWB-A IC1A PF3 NO
mechanism and PC23.

T-66
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
96.11.01

1151SBT040110A
1-10. C0990: Main Tray Upward Motion Failure
C0991: Main Tray Downward Motion Failure
C0992: Main Tray Downward Motion Failure
C0993: Main Tray Upward Motion Failure
C0994: Main Tray Elevator M26’s Failure to Turn
Symbol Name
PC2 Main Tray Lower Position Sensor
PC5 Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor
PC19 3rd Drawer Paper Lift-Up Sensor
PC35 Lower Position Sensor
M26 Elevator Motor
PWB-H Cabinet Transport Board
PWB-A Master Board (PF-104)

T-67
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
96.11.01

C0990, C0991

Step Check Item Result Action

Check 3rd Drawer Lift-Up Sensor YES Replace PWB-A (PF-104).
1 PC19.
Check the Paper Pressure Releasing
See p. T-3 (PF-104) PWB-A IC1A PG3. NO
mechanism and PC19.

C0992, C0993

Step Check Item Result Action

Check Lower Position Sensor PC35. YES Replace PWB-A (PF-104)
1 See p. T-3. (PF-104) PWB-A IC2A PB3
NO Check the PC35.
Check Main Tray Lower Position Sen- YES Replace PWB-A (PF-104)
2 sor PC2. See p. T-3.
(PF-104) PWB-A IC2A PC1 NO Check the PC2.

C0994

Step Check Item Result Action

Does M26 turn when the Paper De- Perform step 3.
1 YES
scent key is pressed?
Does the voltage across PJ10A-1 Replace M26 or check PWB-H and flat
(down) on PF-104 PWB-A and GND, YES cable.
and across PJ10A-2 (up) and GND,
2
change from DC0V to DC24V when the
Drawer is slid in or the Paper Descent Replace PWB-A (PF-104)
NO
key is pressed?
Does the voltage across PJ9A-5 on YES Replace PWB-A (PF-104)
PF-104 PWB-A and GND change in
3 Check the pulse disk, Gear, and Sen-
the range between DC0V and DC5V
NO sor.
while M26 is turning?

T-68
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
96.11.01

1151SBT040111A
1-11. C0998: Shifter Transfer Failure
C0999: Shifter Return Failure
C099A: Shifter Return Failure
C099b: Shifter Transfer Failure
C099c: Shifter Motor M27’s Failure to Turn
Symbol Name
PC3 Shifter Home Position Sensor
PC4 Shifter Return Position Sensor
PC6 Shift Motor Pulse Sensor
M27 Paper Shift Motor
PWB-H Cabinet Transport Board
PWB-A Master Board (PF-104)

T-69
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
96.11.01

C0998, C0999

Step Check Item Result Action

Check Shifter Return Position Sensor YES Replace PWB-A (PF-104).
1 PC4. See p. T-3
(PF-104) PWB-A IC2A PD1. NO Check PWB-H, flat cable and PC4.

C099A, C099b

Step Check Item Result Action

Check Shifter Home Position Sensor YES Replace PWB-A (PF-104)
1 PC3. See p. T-3
(PF-104) PWB-A IC2A PC0 NO Check PWB-H, flat cable and PC3.

C099C

Step Check Item Result Action

Does M27 turn when the Drawer is slid Perform step 3.
1 in with a paper stack loaded in the Shift YES
Tray?
Does the voltage across PJ10A-3 Replace M27 or check PWB-H and flat
(moving to right) on PF-104 PWB-A YES cable.
2
and GND change from DC0V to
DC24V when doing step 1? NO Replace PWB-A (PF-104)

Does the voltage across PJ9A-12 on YES Replace PWB-A (PF-104)

3 PF-104 PWB-A and GND change from
Check the pulse disk, Gear, and Sen-
DC0V to DC5V while M27 is turning? NO
sor.

T-70
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
96.11.01

1151SBT040112A
1-12. C099E: Shift Gate Position Detecting Failure
C099F: Shift Gate Position Detecting Failure
C0996: 3rd Drawer Lock Release Failure
C0F79: Paper Empty Sensor Failure
Symbol Name
PC1 Shift Tray Paper Empty Sensor
PC25 3rd Drawer Set Sensor
PC20 3rd Drawer Paper Empty Sensor
PC34 Shift Gate Position Detecting
Sensor
SL41 3rd Drawer Lock Solenoid
PWB-E Main Tray Paper Empty Board
PWB-H Cabinet Transport Board
PWB-A Master Board (PF-104)

T-71
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
96.11.01

C099E, C099F

Step Check Item Result Action

Check Shift Gate Position Detecting Replace PWB-A (PF-104).
YES
Sensor PC34.
1
See p. T-3 Check PWB-H, flat cable and PC34.
(PF-104) PWB-A IC1A PC1. NO

C0996

Step Check Item Result Action

Does the voltage across PJ6A-2 on Replace SL41.
PF-104 PWB-A and GND change from YES
2 DC0V to DC24V when the Paper De-
scent Key is pressed and the Main Tray Replace PWB-A (PF-104)
NO
has completed downward motion?

Check 3rd Drawer Set Sensor PC25. YES Replace PWB-A (PF-104)
3 See p. T-3 (PF-104) PWB-A IC1A PG2
NO Check PWB-H, flat cable and PC25.

C0F79

Step Check Item Result Action

Check 3rd Drawer Paper Empty Sen- YES Replace PWB-A (PF-104)
1 sor PC20. See p. T-3
(PF-104) PWB-A IC1A PC0. NO Check PC20.

Check Main Tray Paper Empty Board YES Replace PWB-A (PF-104)
2 PWB-E. See p. T-3
(PF-104) PWB-A IC1A PF3. NO Check PWB-H, flat cable and PWB-E.

Check Shift Tray Paper Empty Sensor Replace PWB-A (PF-104)

YES
PC1.
3
See p. T-3 Check PWB-H, flat cable and PC1.
(PF-104) PWB-A IC1A PD1 NO

T-72
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
96.11.01

1151SBT040113A
1-13. C0d00: Duplex Unit Front/Rear Edge Guide Plates home position
detection failure
C0d20: Duplex Unit Trailing Gate Unit home position detection
failure
C0d50: Duplex Unit Drive Motor’s failure to turn
C0d51: Duplex Unit Drive Motor turning at abnormal timing
Symbol Name
PC8 Duplex Gate Home Position
Sensor
PC9 Front/Rear Edge Guide Plate
Home Position Sensor
M31 Duplex Unit Drive Motor
M32 Gate Motor
M33 Front/Rear Edge Guide Drive
Motor
PWB-G Duplex Unit Master Board

1151C11TAA

T-73
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
96.11.01

C0d00, C0d20

Step Check Item Result Action

1 Is C0d20 being shown? YES Perform step 4.
Does Front/Rear Edge Guide Drive YES Check for possible overload.
Motor M33 start turning when the
2 Replace PWB-G, PWB-A (PF-204)
Power Switch is turned ON or the
NO (PF-4D), or M33.
Duplex Unit slid into position?
Check Front/Rear Edge Guide plate Replace PWB-G or PWB-A (PF-204)
YES
3 Home position sensor PC9. See p. T-3 (PF-4D).
(AD-8) PWB-G IC1G PC3.
NO Check PC9.
Does Gate Motor M32 start turning YES Check for possible overload.
4 when the Power Switch is turned ON
Replace PWB-G, PWB-A (PF-204)
or the Duplex Unit slid into position? NO
(PF-4D), or M32.
Check Duplex Gate Home Position Replace PWB-G or PWB-A (PF-204)
YES
5 Sensor PC8. See p. T-3 (PF-4D).
(AD-8) PWB-G IC1G PE0.
NO Check PC8.

C0d50, C0d51

Step Check Item Result Action

A Is C0d51 being shown? YES Begin with step E.
Does Duplex Unit Drive Motor M31 Check the rollers, rolls, and gears for
B start turning when the Start Key is YES possible overload.
pressed?
Does the voltage across PJ6G-2 on Replace PWB-G or PWB-A (PF-204)
PWB-G and GND change from DC5V (PF-4D).
C NO
to DC0V when the Start Key is
pressed?
Does the voltage across PJ6G-1 on YES Replace M31.
D PWB-G and GND remain DC5V when
Replace PWB-G or PWB-A (PF-204)
the Start Key is pressed? NO
(PF-4D).
Does the voltage across PJ6G-2 on Replace PWB-G or PWB-A (PF-204)
E PWB-G and GND remain DC0V when YES (PF-4D).
the Power Switch is turned ON?
Does the voltage across PJ6G-1 on YES Replace M31.
F PWB-G and GND remain DC0V when
Replace PWB-G or PWB-A (PF-204)
the Power Switch is turned ON? NO
(PF-4D).

T-74
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
96.11.01

1151SBT040114A
1-14. C0F10: Faulty AE Sensor level
C0F30: ATDC Sensor malfunction
Symbol Name
PWB-A Main Control Board
PWB-H AE Sensor Board
UN3 ATDC Sensor

1151C10TAA

T-75
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
96.11.01

C0F10

Step Check Item Result Action

Is the voltage across PJ12A-3 on YES Replace PWB-A.
PWB-A and GND in the range between
1 Check the photo receiver of the AE
DC2V and DC4V when the Start Key is Sensor for contamination or replace
NO
pressed in the F3 operation?
PWB-H.

C0F30

Step Check Item Result Action

Is the voltage across PJ1A-3 on Check the ATDC Sensor and the
A PWB-A and GND DC0V after the YES connection between the Imaging Unit
Power Switch has been turned ON? and copier.
Is the voltage across PJ1A-3 on Replace PWB-A.
YES
PWB-A and GND in the range between
B
DC0.5V and DC4.5V after the Start Replace the ATDC Sensor.
Key has been pressed? NO

T-76
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
96.11.01

1151SBT040115A
1-15. C0F02: Original size detection error (Defective CPU)
C0FE2 to C0FFF: Original Size Detecting Sensor failure
Symbol Name
PC113 Original Size Detecting Sensor
FD2
PC114 Original Size Detecting Sensor
CD1
PC115 Original Size Detecting Sensor
FD3
PC116 Original Size Detecting Sensor
CD2
UN2 Original Size Detecting Board
PWB-A Master Board

1151C09TAA

T-77
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
96.11.01

Step Check Item Result Action

Is any code from among C0FE2 to Perform step 4.
1 YES
C0FFF being shown?
Are jumper straps installed in the Change the strap position of J1 and J2.
following position for J1 and J2 of UN2?
2 NO
J1: On the end not marked with “O”
J2: On the end not marked with “O”
Does the LED of I/O port check PWB-A YES Replace PWB-A.
3 (IC5A) PA3 blink after the Power
Switch has been turned ON? NO Replace UN2.

Is the Sensor located at the correct Change the position of the Sensor.
4 NO
position?
Does the problem persist even after Replace UN2 or PWB-A.
5 the corresponding Sensor has been YES
replaced?

T-78
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
96.11.01

1151SBT0402A
2. Power is not Turned ON

Symbol Name
PWB-A Master Board
PWB-C Power Supply Board
PU2 DC Power Supply Unit
S1 Power Switch
S21 Front Door Interlock Switch
RY1 Main Relay

T-79
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
96.11.01

Symptom Step Check Item Result Action

Power is not Is the source voltage being Check Fuse or line voltage.
supplied to the supplied to the circuit
1 NO
copier at all. across PJ1-1 and 3 of
PU2?
Is the voltage across PJ3-1 Check Fuse of PU2 or re-
of PU2 and GND, and place PU2.
2 NO
across PJ3-3 on PU2 and
GND, DC24V?
Is the voltage across Check S1 and S21.
PJ1C-3 on PWB-C and
3 GND, and across PJ1C-5 NO
on PWB-C and GND,
DC24V?
Is LD1 on PWB-A lit up? Check Fuse of PWB-C or
4 NO
replace PWB-C.
Only the control Is the voltage across Check S21.
panel Indicators 5 PJ1C-3 on PWB-C and NO
light up. GND DC24V?
RY1 is not
Is the voltage across Replace PWB-A.
energized.
PJ1A-14 on PWB-A and
6 GND, and across PJ1A-15 NO
on PWB-A and GND, near
DC0V?
Is the voltage across Replace PWB-C.
PJ1C-2 on PWB-C and
7 GND DC24V after the NO
Power Switch has been
turned ON?
Is the voltage across Check RY1.
PJ1C-1 on PWB-C and
8 GND DC0V after the Power NO
Switch has been turned
ON?

* If the problem persists even after the above procedures, the harness is probably short-circuited.
Check the harnesses.

T-80
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
96.11.01

1151SBT0403A
3. E1, E2
Symbol Name
UN3 ATDC Sensor
F4 I/U Fuse
PWB-A Master Board

1151C07TAA

T-81
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
96.11.01

Code Step Check Item Result Action

Is the seal peeled off the opening Peel off the seal and turn the
1 NO
or starter been fully charged? Power Switch OFF, then ON.
Is the voltage across PJ1A-3 on Replace PWB-A.
E1 PWB-A and GND in the range YES
2 between DC0.5V and DC4.5V af-
ter the Start Key has been turned Replace the ATDC Sensor.
NO
ON?

Is the voltage across PJ1A-6 on YES Replace PWB-A.

E2 A PWB-A and GND 0V (is F4
blown)? NO Replace F4 or PWB-A.

T-82
Interleaf EP2010/EP1083 TROUBLESHOOTING
96.11.01

1151SBT000EA

Copyright
1996 MINOLTA CO., LTD
Printed in Japan

Use of this manual should

be strictly supervised to
avoid disclosure of
confidential information.

MINOLTA CO., LTD. 1151-7998-11 96115700

Printed in Japan